Home

2011 Dodge Charger Owner`s Manual

1. se 131 Mi Uconnect Phone sese 131 O Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 NAV 131 BODEIBHOD 64456346 e reps euin nieri 134 O Phone Call Features 04 145 O Uconnect Phone Features 150 O Advanced Phone Connectivity 154 O Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect PROE used Rd aX E as 155 O General Information 163 Bl Voice Command 163 D Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 NAV 163 D Uconnect Voice Commands 165 O Voice Tree os 444446665 Fao Ge em ade Di 167 NM dis AE EE a ee re ee ae eer EE 171 O Power Seats If Equipped 171 oO Power Lumbar If Equipped 173 o Heated Seats If Equipped 174 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 o Manual Seats If Equipped 176 E HOO est lS san do ENE OP eh ON PR DE 178 ELPOIGING Rear Seal 520 40 8 eon MR tases 181 W Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 183 O Programming The Memory Feature 184 O Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory 185 o Memory Position Recall uve vs 186 O Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only sace aem rsss 186 ll To Open And Close The Hood 188 NE p 189 A Headent OWN e dei RS eT A 189 D Automatic Headlights If Equipped 190 o Headlights On With Wipers Available
2. Fuse Spare j Fus Spae 25 Amp Transmission 15 Amp Transmission Shifter Natural Blue Fuse Spare oe Fuse Spare EM Radiator Fan 2 25 Amp Engine Module Natural mn Power Steering 2 Jj Fuse Spae Jj Fuse Spae Natural 25 Amp Anti Lock Brakes 25 Amp Fuel Pump Natural Natural MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 20 Amp Powertrain 2 10 Amp AWD Module Front Red Axle Disconnect 0 Amp Anti Lock Brake j Fue Spae Modul Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Ka EMEN KAS EE 50 37 10 Amp Engine Controller B Rad Fan Relays mm Ane Mode ELE 5 Fuse Spare 39 10 Amp Power Steering Module AC Clutch Relay 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center _ iei and bu Rear Power Distribution Center Opening The Access Panel MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 Fuse Fuse e When installing the power distribution center Kai IE el cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Yellow erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so 3 Fuse Spare may allow water to get into the power distribution 4 DAN Front PDC Feed 2 center and
3. 84 Brightness Interior Lights us ea dex ace 9t KERR 197 Bulb Replacement wor oe aa cate veo ierti 505 506 Bulbs LIDI 44945950 ee xw ER ROS TERR 88 505 Camera Rear o 4 44444466606 bee Ga os 243 Capacitics Fd geeivaceeceeetaes poate deus 510 Caps Filler OER NE ower Son ac Re tee neyo on 468 469 Radiator Coolant Pressure 483 Car Washes 0 eee 491 Carbon Monoxide Warning 85 414 Cargo Vehicle Loading ea ea RR DS RE He 421 Cellular PRONE 2 is oe veoh es AS EE SEER 329 Certification Label oi ae ne 64 oes sea eed 422 Chains De iss oh Gee bee SOR Se eR SEER OS 397 Chaneme A Flat THE uos sao 9 31 ER ores aes 439 Carb Vie SI vaag GE EE KORE ET BAAR RD RR 380 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 278 463 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 84 Gie ale PLC 84 Child Restraint 122 2999 73 75 78 82 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 77 78 Child Saey LOCKS eee ee se quit thes ERST S 33 Clan AW Gasoline uses vun vu wey sa eques e yx 411 Cleaning o PI ey cy oe PD EE oe oe T 493 Windshield Wiper Blades 476 Climate CONUOL si se es i nri ion m pase ee Di 330 Beide el ARE ER OR EE EG 265 Cold Weather Operation ia kus RR homme 350 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 329 Compact Spare te sweis 6545 6449084 RES 392 Computer Inp TIavel 35 6454 ad eder S RES 295 N INDEX 545 Connector UG 2229229937 99 1550 EE Ge N
4. 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE For devices which are not made a favorite the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you would need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device follow these steps e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch to select the particular Phone or the Paired Audio Sources soft key and then an Audio Device e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Disconnect Device soft key N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Touch the X to exit out of
5. Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings A The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pres sure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will aut
6. as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure 410 STARTING AND OPERATING warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses United 5tates 444 664 ka ss MRXCAWAMAA Canada 2546A CAWAMAA FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800d ab6 line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 5 7L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for RECOMMENDED OCTANE
7. e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 e Air Bag Warning Light Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides e Instrument Panel output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact e Knee Impact Bolster sensors e Steering Wheel and Column e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag e Driver Advanced Front Air Bag The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB used for more severe collisions e Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags may provide No objects should be placed over or near the air enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a bag on the instrument panel because oy such side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air objects could cause harm if th
8. This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e f for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 535 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional
9. the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au tomatically dependent upon e Altitude e Vehicle loading e Driving style e Shift lever position e Accelerator position e Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE e After selecting any driving position wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especially when the engine is cold e If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to press the ENGINE START STOP button to return to the OFF position before restarting Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the ignition is not turned to the OFF position first 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position To mov
10. 5 Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink
11. Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result The center console outlet is powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the engine from starting Front Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 Center Console Power Outlet Rear Center Console Power Outlet There is also a 12 volt power outlet located on the back of the center console for rear passengers This power outlet has power available only when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet TA e 2 Do not touch with wet hands B Close the lid when not in use and while driving S uL l the vehicle Mi BE Fil If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure TE SI RS n d md 072736519 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel amp Power Outlet Console Rear 2 38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw e After the use of
12. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2010 Chrysler Group LLC o m O c REEDE e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION sit ees Be n
13. sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion N WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES 451 WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the eng
14. 021935320 Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect Touch the power window switches will remain active 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the Key Fob Occupants particularly unattended children can be come entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may re sult in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Lift the window switch to the second detent relea
15. ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability 372 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Brake Assist System BAS This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma neuvers This system detects an emergency braking situ ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including
16. EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s API GL 5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent API GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent MOPAR Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44 40 or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS W Maintenance Schedule 514 O Required Maintenance Intervals 516 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 514 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine op
17. If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press the amp and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial Hi 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF NOTE The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection It is recommended to press the transfer soft key when leaving the vehicle Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call Emergency or Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e T
18. Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blad
19. Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator flashing severe catalytic converter damage and m Light in the instrument cluster will come on power loss will soon occur Immediate service is e when the ignition switch is turned to the required ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 12 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC i
20. NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEE EE The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during NING EIS ootnded e If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to impacts that require air bag occupant protection WARNING your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag main free from any obstructions The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects enhanced protection and works together with the Driver between you and the side air bags the perfor Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be
21. Settings PANG kes TIT O Soft Keys AAR AE FOR T D Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings D Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings ll iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped ll Steering Wheel Audio Controls I EOBIDDE us xo sees Ganado Re nay d O Radio Operation xs 208 si SEM RAT SE EE SE RSS 328 298 BICD DVD Disc Maintenance 329 298 W Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 329 B Climate Controls 0 00005 330 inso O General Overview l l 330 10 81 O Climate Control Functions 336 499 DO Automatic Temperature Control ATC 338 HE Operame lips iss sands ees DK BY ess 339 ze 27 eam OS UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 6 040135327 Air Outlet 7 ESC Off Switch 13 Engine Start Stop Button 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Uconnect Touch System Hard Controls 14 Trunk Release Button 3 Hazard Switch 9 SD Memory Card Slot 15 Dimmer Controls 4 Uconnect Touch System 10 Power Outlet 16 Hood Release 5 Climate Control Hard Controls 11 CD DVD Slot 17 Headlight Switch 6 Glove Compartment 12 Storage Compartment 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040336120 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer
22. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie
23. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper
24. a The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF Synchronizing ESC If the power supply is interrupted battery 5 disconnected or discharged the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible STARTING AND OPERATING 379 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H Tire Markings e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 2 Size Designati
25. activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle 3 6 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a HSA Off hill and this could cause a collision with another If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver standing Your Instrument Panel for furthe
26. e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation To make your selection touch the Music Info Cleanup soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch Supplement SIRIUS Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programm
27. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 If Engine Fails To Start Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery After Starting booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will booster battery or the battery in another vehicle decrease as the engine warms up This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly Refer to Jump Starting i
28. specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 382 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing zits the tire size two di ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Numbe
29. vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE e Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve
30. 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multi Displacement System MDS Re fer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment
31. 338 Automatic Transaxle peer dd IE n as a dedo Ohba Kas m Gare 488 Automatic Transmission 355 488 489 ico EMG gaan bene EE ue eae 489 512 N ne PPP 359 Fluid and Filter Changes cse cepe dada 489 ED e ane aa AR E PX EO E PER S 489 Puid Level Check ous zoe vr ma repa S as 489 Ecl TOE cece eeu eu SUR eee eee ea 512 Sear Rages P CC 356 vani M PP ee BE dk oo RES REG 355 Decal A GCUIVES sesarat rer Ee EER a 488 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 358 AWOSE seep ss 959 Adel lid 236524552 ORE EE AG RE TERT NS 512 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 512 B Pillar Location 2242244563 EE A S PEE 384 Diet uas orae adorans SE HERE Pura E RUF eee 471 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 23 LOCOHOD oues sees urbs EP HR E EUR 47 Belts Saat sisie ceRRR shee bb 2 HERE EER 46 86 Body Mechanism Lubrication 476 Brake Assist System ass ds ey SUP aor es hes 372 Brake Control System Electronic 43 rate scm Yess a 371 Drake MiG ua uua AURA ame rotend ai agpi 512 Drake Sell P Gee ee eee DU RA ee 486 Anti Lock ABS 24 aca pede du Red RE PEZ 369 Fluid Check lees 486 512 Master Cylinder 442 ceviche see db pes lt 486 Dark Nie oa ens hada BERE bee eke eee 366 Haruno LIS 23e 9 9 EDE oe Ee S REN 281 Brake Parking 544 INDEX NEE Id Brake Transmission Interlock 355 lic ERR SERE LE BROOS ER ED EN 486 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle
32. 700 Can copied 348 555 1212 wilt amy pond number supported by your Mob phont 5 These commands can be used during a phone call affir pishing the Lone voe eomimiasmd button on the steering Wheel Mesac note Ie cas will pe mulled while the VA season is active E Sunc did bonde for subraad ayaa a iuba ehh s call rm ductis T Binnnmp Dal breves in contac names is passie bul only the fins numitor enoouniensd in a canusci name will e sen Fru example il ner is a member slored ux ia Horse and tort numlers Tar ihe ooniacd Moicemai password only ihe Home number wil be sant H M yoru phot doses riot suppor plicasetsoe dosniai or call log devenit over BT thin these commends will reum a response iisdeczabung hal lee contest does mal Eai an Ins phie U Berger and Towing azsislance are conacis ihe hove been pre iusdind in lbe phonebooks Commands such as Call Emergency and Call towing assistance will coll lhe carmesponding number sioned wilh ihnse contmecis 030538871 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Uconnect Text Messaging Uconnect Text Messaging Reading Text Messages ina cremas Cs Du Se WET eo aer pusteng ree Lipari Praag rd fre roere GEN ce KAT waar Wur eat mama Gos aero MEE pessime Set iL connect EA Earl huin Enter message fmm Message heel i riafnerd lisi prende wil Be reed cut heer it by syslem of say bor ower Ing an ihe SLIS tn haar a 18 vehicle audi EDT defined massages system After ib message te
33. A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 516 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN Id Once A Month At Each Oil Change e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter damage e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION e nspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake Failure to perform the required maintenance items master cylinder and power steering and add as may result in damage to the vehicle needed Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 517 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km 7 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 8 000 miles 13 000 km Replace the air conditio
34. A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA n THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 WARNING Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO riding in these areas are more likely to be seri follow these safety tips ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or belts out of the area Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
35. Bluetooth soft key Touch to select the particular Phone or the Phone Audio soft key and then an Audio Device At the Options pop up screen touch the Connect Device soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Select the Phone or Audio Device At the Options pop up screen touch the Disconnect Device soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Select the Phone or Audio Device At the Options pop up screen touch the Delete De vice soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the e currently connected device e At the Options pop up screen touch the Make Favor ite soft key you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access
36. Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintena
37. ER WK RE eae ea ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 22 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Id INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Con
38. Profile may support this feature See Uconnect M e website for supported phones e To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook e follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Emergency And Towing Assistance The 911 Help numbers can only be altered These can not be deleted or the names can not be changed To change the 911 Help number follow these steps e Touch the phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen e Touch the 911 Help soft key Touch the appropriate listing to alter Emergency for e
39. RATING RM METHOD NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 411 optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
40. System eat DOOIE sis a xus SOEK ELS DE HR OS 33 W Keyless Enter N Go E Windows METER IE EE EE RE eens 39 O ower WNdOwWS se e bahay ow B eo doe ee Sk 39 O Wind Buffetng ue oce ma ERR RUP Reb 42 W Trunk Lock And Release see 42 W Trunk Safety Warning 43 O Irunk Emergency Release 4125 4 242644 HI 43 W Occupant Restraints 000 44 El Lap Shoulder DENS ou cu ieu eie bc ine rare 46 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 51 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 52 o Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR IE POUIPPCO desee wp 445 635545 OF oes DE 52 O Energy Management Feature 93 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 El Seat belt Pretemsioners eire tae sn 54 AC Mld Restant ESE 244095543 cna CRIME 73 3 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Mi Engine Break In Recommendations 84 BeltAlert oe ee nnne i IN Uo TIPS gece seas ERU AS RR E ieii 84 I d Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 56 O Transporting Passengers 84 ci Seat Belt Extender 1 ca ede eReERuA N 56 o Exhaust Gas AA OO wh bas nds 85 EDE EEN BE RE EN Ee B Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Bags eene os pou Es oa oe REDE Si De eh eee eee ease 86 O Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 65 3 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make O Event Data Recorder EDR 72 Outside The Vehicle 88 12 THINGS TO K
41. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together g N f mn i Removing Slack From Belt 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Adjustable Uppe
42. VEHICLE 137 68 4 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out 3 Select Yes to begin the pairing process Then search KEUSES sl eee CP for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen No phone connected Would you like to pair a phone e f No is selected touch the Settings soft key from the Uconnect Phone main screen e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e See Step 4 to complete the process 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 68 44 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Wo 72 Bluetooth pairing in progress Please wait 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range Pair Additional Mobile Phones e Touch the More soft key to begin e Touch the Settings soft key e Next touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When pr
43. W Starting Procedures iss oo ER emo rmn 348 W Automatic Transmission 392 H Automatic Transmission 348 O General Information lusus HKevless Enter NO 4 seas eee aruchare 9 i use 349 D Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System E Normal SIE sserrep RD HARE eee ee eas 349 O Five Speed Automatic Transmission O Extreme Cold Weather Lear RIN ES s ca a ORAAL EE RAL RE HERE 356 Ga UNIUS EE ED N Eise e EO OE TER ER DE 359 oO If Engine Fails To Start 5 29x OR axe EE 351 TOPI EE N EN 350 sl jie NS sos see HER eee eee EE RE 951 ll All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 360 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 352 344 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 361 O Acceleration uso 2 3 9 ctp 9th BIER EUR 361 EL DEON oos OU ee AR ORE ON AUR RODEO 362 Bl Driving Through Water 362 EH Flowing Rising Water 22 320984249 363 O Shallow Standing Water 363 W Power Steering 000005 365 ll Multi Displacement System MDS If Equipped 5 7L Engine Only 366 W Parking Brake 0 000 366 W Anti Lock Brake System 369 N Electronic Brake Control System 371 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 371 O Traction Control System TCS 371 U Brake Assist System BAS sss eom nt 372 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 372 O H
44. With Automatic Headlights Only 190 O Smartbeam If Equipped 190 O Headlight Time Delay secs ains O Daytime Running Lights DRL I EquiIDDEd 244655465552 ESE HR PEE Alight On Remibuel ara ugue queen sep t pp t 192 B Fog Lights If Equipped 192 o Multifunction Lever s seek KERKRADE 193 ETE DIE lS sos an ee ay as UIER up ED 193 A Lane Change ASSISE ss 2 uos s brenda Ra 194 a High Low Beam Switch Ls 194 sd ESE MOE TE EE She shee e eee 194 O Front Map Reading Lights 4 2 2m m mm t 195 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie ELOIBBISRE bd Sox eva c9 SIE PENATI 196 W Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 206 Hierop bolle so oa 6 os hy na 4 4 E DE 196 W Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 207 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 198 EIER VAS os acce x eed ek Gt SUR AUR ieii 208 H Intermittent Wiper System 199 o To Set A Desired Speed uua e peda Xs 209 O Wiper Opera sassi eo SES HR ADA s 199 El lo DIESE DEO vissie pa dO PRE DE 209 o Windshield Washers s ru oto 199 E To Resume Speed aa as eu sce oe eher 4 209 Mist Teler n Ee dor uo d es dedi edet 200 o To Vary The Speed Setting 209 o Headlights On With Wipers Available Ei To Accelerate For Passing soet De RY DEd 210 With Automatic Headlights Only 200 ll Adaptive Cruise Control ACC O Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 200 K PQuIpped 4 4
45. a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 The Cruise Control system has two control modes Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an steering wheel operates the ACC system appropriate distance between vehicles e Normal fixed speed cruise control mode is for cruis ing at a constant preset speed For additional informa tion refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section 4 ma s RES ON OFF M NOTE The system will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected CANCEL ser You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected 1 DISTANCE SETTING 2 RES 3 SET 4 CANCEL 5 ON OFF 6 MODE 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Contr
46. accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming returned to 0 mph 0 km h The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK ae OR OON e For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect Touch refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understand 5 The doors were not previously unlocked ing Your Instrument Panel for further information 4 The driver door is opened 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h e For vehicles not equipped with the Uconnect Touch f he followi To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Pe Eon pe Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors further information 2 Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature 3 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between in accordance with local laws LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position However do not start the engine 4 Within 30 seconds press the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
47. alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution
48. also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 for it For example you can use the compound com mand form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver sational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly omith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command VR button Voice Command Tree Refer t
49. area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle Side Monitoring 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light wil
50. as it may cause damage to Lo the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path 030934978 Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward or rearward to Power Lumbar Switch 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks ne may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated seat that has been overheated could cause serious using the Uconnect Touch System burns due to the increased surface temperature of WISIN the seat Front Heated Seat Operation Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 4 3 Press the CLIMATE hard key located next to the Uconnect Touch display to enter the climate control screen e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause bu
51. baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants And Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restrain
52. brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main WARNING Continued taining Your Vehicle for further information e T
53. burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster N NE aat Trip A 0 0mi Tire PSI Vehicle Info System Setup 56789 mi 041035317 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following Radio Info Fuel Economy Vehicle Speed Trip Info Tire Pressure Vehicle Info Stored Warning Messages Turn Menu OFF 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up wheel N ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Ve hicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Trip Info Vehicle Speed and Turn Menu OFF and sub menus DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menu and Ve hicle Info
54. compat After cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification
55. damage the seal during removal 021337430 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 e This device must accept any interference received while still maintaining security The system has a range including interference that may cause undesired of approximately 300 ft 91 m operation NOTE NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic p proved by the party responsible for compliance could transmission to be equipped with Remote Start id th thority t te th i L venus DE ee a He e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal may reduce this range distance check for these two con
56. disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the
57. driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Miles Per Gallon MPG The Miles Per Gallon MPG feature displays instanta neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE this function cannot be reset Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km
58. e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e low road noise e You can say O letter O for 0 zero e smooth road surface e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing e fully closed windows wr number combinations may not be supported d th dition ba e e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be e Even though the system is designed for users speaking compromised with the convertible top down i h American English French ish ac in North American English French and Spanish ac Far End Audio Performance cents the system may not always work for some Tw Audi lity i imi l e When navigating through an automated system such daa THE as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of e low to medium blower setting h o a i speaking the digit string make sure to say Send e low to medium vehicle speed e Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the M LN M e low road noise vehicle is not in motion is recommended h f e Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo a tmedc saree cal name reco
59. ees Jack Location ARE eee enact needa vena 440 jies OpetaiOn a5 es a aae s au PES DRAERS IE RA 443 Jacking INSHUCHONS a uos d eut or 4424550455 443 JUMP OES arare d wvg ar dee puse 1d apu EER 448 Eerlik einde S ety agus OE ees eee DER SOR 14 Key EROCTAIMINING 245244 do ERR AO newb CX Y AE 17 Key Replacement ou ey veo ap be vee ER CE ar E on 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer s 3 55 2x9 41 9 REED RR 15 Keyless Enter N G0 ouo edocet ees 35 249 Keyless Entry System uaa ae RR REK tao eens dedos 20 Ie Jess GO 24446 risate dO EIU Ce OPE HS ES RE 2 OVS uus suet QE C URSI REST os ee eee RS 12 Kice DOLET C ee oo 57 Lane Change and Turn Signals 193 Lane Change ASSIS sos aor HIED See EHE 194 Lap shoulder Dells iosa duce purs tur d eon de d den 46 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 77 78 PS Ate SN SEN ER N FEE A7 es SEE RE HE RT OE EET N NG 68 ln vcrc 188 Lead Free Gasoline 0 eee eee 410 beaks Fluid ue bdo m HOP re Se e eA 88 biede TES 24 oo a0 fa ee Oa oe Se oe OE OU 395 Lielit BHlDS oase kn 3 EER BEREA eee 88 505 Erg es 88 189 tie xu BARRE Yd e PES 66 67 72 86 281 PIU MT 281 AMLOK EERS EE ES EAS bonne 276 Automatic Headlights 25 04420494244 ER EE 190 Brake Assist Wann qx accade res o T RES 977 Brake Warning Bue Replacement 3 12393 24 6445 225 505 506 Dayime HDI reperi eee amp ee dor E 192 Dimmer Switch Headlight 193 194 Electron
60. equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive mat
61. even with the bottom of the hole Use this plug to add fluid as required The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment To inspect the differ ential fluid level remove the fill plug The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole Fluid Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Rear Axle For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Axle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed
62. extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022635326 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger 2 Knee Bolster Advanced Front Air Bags 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE The
63. follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e BalancelFade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings
64. following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing All Wheel Drive AWD Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 522 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 80 000 miles 130 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 72 000 miles 117 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect exhaust system Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends an
65. for most driving conditions The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows 374 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The ESC Off switch is located on the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illu minate To turn the ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will turn off NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESC on again by momen tarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by pre
66. for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for informa tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for information 432 STARTING AND OPERATING ee on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace CAUTION ment procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg and GAWR limits loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible WARNING personal injury Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s An electronically actuated trailer brak troller i eie head coni us ica AE hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required system and cause it to fail You might not have
67. friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 426 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id A weight distributing system works by applying lever WARNING age through spring load bars They are typically used e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the system may reduce handling stability braking tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used performance and could result in a collision in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro e Weight distributing systems may not be compat vides for a more level ride offering more consistent ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control reational vehicle dealer for additional also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and information contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch
68. full name you could press the EVR button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More hard key then touch the Settings soft key 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio syst
69. if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows 436 STARTING AND OPERATING M Cooling System RECREATIONAL TOWING To reduce potential for engine and transmission over BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC nC ae ER eee Two Wheel Drive and All Wheel Drive City Driving Recreational towing with all four wheels on the ground When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans or using a tow dolly is NOT ALLOWED The only mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed acceptable method for towing this vehicle behind an i other vehicle is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels Highway Driving Reduce speed OFF the ground Air Conditioning CAUTION Turn off temporarily Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flashers 438 B If Your Engine Overheats 438 N Jacking And Tire Changing 439 O Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 440 O Preparations Fo
70. if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts This feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat b
71. injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident best Continued N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING Continued 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too e Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and E adjust the front seat Pulling Out The Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 When the be
72. is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i if your vehicle is equipped Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the EVR button The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can
73. is deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans start the vehicle ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down phone connection loaded and updated every time a phone is connected Managing Your Favorite Phonebook to the Uconnect Phone There are three ways you can add an entry to your i F ite Ph e Depending on the maximum number of entries down avorite Phonebook loaded there may be a short delay before the latest 1 During an active call of a number to make a favorite downloaded names can be used Until then if avail touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail main screen able for use 2 After loading the mobile phonebook select phone e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile book from the Phone main screen then select the appro phone is accessible priate number Touch the next to the selected number to display the options pop up In the pop up select Add to Favorites N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 68 4 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou WETE touch Add from Mobile You will then be asked which EE Ee ed rage Y OE TS TTL contact and number to choose from your mobile phone psit book When complete the new favorite will be shown z amp Ana Conda Mobil
74. latches Never drive your vehicle unless ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged rior lights and fog lights WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death Headlight Switch 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds
75. modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav i The Uconnect Voice Command system al ti VR lows you to control your AM FM radio satel lite radio disc player SD Card USB iPod and Sirius Travel Link NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Command system as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Command system to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Uconnect Voice Command i VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If no command is spoken the system will say one of two responses e didn t understand e didn t get that etc If a command is not spoken a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecut
76. multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message sent e Press Send or Cancel N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Send Messages Using Voice Commands 68 4 FM91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou e Press the Se button Messaging gt 1 Yes e After the Listening prompt and the following beep nu TIT 2 No say Send message to John Smith mobile 3 Call me e After the system prompts you for what message you 4 Need directions want to send say the message you wish to send or say 5 I ll be there in XX minutes List There are 18 preset messages 6 Okay While the list of defined messages are being read you can interrupt the system by pressing the vR button and saying the message you want to send l List of Preset Messages After the system confirms that you want to send your message to John Smith your message will be sent Lgs 2 No 3 Okay 4 I can t talk right now 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 6 7 8 9 Call me TH call you later I m on my way Thanks IIl be late 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 I will be number minutes late See you in number minutes Stuck in traffic Start without me Where are you Are you there yet I need directions I m lost See you later Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose conne
77. near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month piod Rib Vd ies Rm power ou ng e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges finish y 5 P of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open CAUTION e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces e f your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi cause that destroys the paint and protective coating 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The paint and decals cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 e f you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap a
78. off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings NOTE e For Manual Climate Controls if the system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e f fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed e f your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or c high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging On systems with Manual Climate Controls the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Mix Floor and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be dis abled automatically if these modes are selected Attempt ing to use
79. on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Special Care Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e f you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
80. outside of the garage while training 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 2 Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and handheld trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the handheld transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to Step 5
81. park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to
82. past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and 3 0 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end WARNING Continued of the stop ue e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys These are all normal characteristics of ABS ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase WARNING braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip tires or the traction afforded ment that may be susceptible to interference The ABS cannot prevent collisions including caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others bility Installation of su
83. play the Playlist Party lunes Radio will play track 8 Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030536938 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Uconnect Voice Command Travel Link commands The commands can be spoken cm any Soren when not on a phone call after pushing lie Ueonnect vale command button insert talking lead icon on he steering wheel Screen will i ex E chanae ip Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change to change to T I Link 2 ar gc l 4 Travel Link Travel Link NFL lisa Sports Favorites Headlines Listings i Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change to change to Travel Link Travel Link Travel Link Home Fuel Prices Weather Motes 1 You can yeploce NFL with any league shown on the sports league screen For example you con say Show MLB headlines or Show PGA Hote Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030536937 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Non phone Universal amp Mode Commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button Navigation EE Route Navigation Home listening to Guidance screen will shown your voice nti on the touch Prompt is pea Hote Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green s
84. pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a mini mum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
85. setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlight With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash whe n the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter
86. setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Manual Seats If Equipped Forward Or Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear ward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Using body pressure move forward and rear ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked 030934979 Manual Seat Adjusting Bar 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ye Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the WARNING outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the position and release the lever To return the seatback lift shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest the lever lean forward and release the lever In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of
87. sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Remote Positive Post 2 Remote Negative Post Remote Battery Posts 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park CAUTION the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal remote positive post of the discharged vehicle injury could result 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery
88. teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact
89. the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING e A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided e Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Road Tire Installation 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of 448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M each lug nut is 110 ft Ibs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are prope
90. the Settings screen Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the currently connected device The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Delete Device soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the Make Favorite soft key you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Automatic download and update if supported begins e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection
91. the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own The driver has the 83 F BRAKE A responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death 23456 mi Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument FCW Message Panel for further information The FCW Status Off Near NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is or Far will be displayed in the Uconnect Touch display 10 mph 16 km h 032433107 The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM Changin
92. the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks did Audio e Equalizer Touch the Equalizer soft key to change this display When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide yo
93. the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status press and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the outside rear view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Blind Spot Alert Touch the Blind Spot Alert soft key to change this dis play When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Moni tor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM
94. the vehicle 030405533 Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK 030440174 BSM Warning Light The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones e The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 The
95. thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 5076 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery fy bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure
96. those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC When ever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used
97. to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time rr Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the
98. to take action in order to avoid the collision For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator Ihis light will turn on to indicate the wind ye shield washer fluid is low a ar e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Malfunction s This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service For further infor mation refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e SERV AWD Service All Wheel Drive Indicator This light will turn on when the All Wheel SERV Drive feature requires service For further in AWD formation refer to All Wheel Drive in Start ing And Operating EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include e Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or i more doors may be ajar e Trunk Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk may be ajar e Oil Pressure Warning Light Q57 This light indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this
99. train components the following guidelines are recom osroosrer Inended Consider the following items when computing the CAUTION weight on the rear axle of the vehicle CAUTION e Do nottow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles e The tongue weight of the trailer 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine e The weight of any other type of Cargo or equipment axle or other parts could be damaged put in or on your vehicle Continued e The weight of the driver and all passengers 430 STARTING AND OPERATING xe CAUTION Continued WARNING Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph and it will not shift during travel When trailering 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts This helps the engine and other parts of the can occur that may be difficult for the driver to vehicle wear in at the heavier loads control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to
100. transmission into NEUTRAL and Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing th
101. vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away a sssest from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking Parking Brake brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise When the parking brake is applied with the ignition the load on the transmission locking mechanism may switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The the instrument cluster will illuminate parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 368 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING WARNING Continued e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued do not leave a vehicle equippe
102. vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed If this occurs speed e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC e The system will not be controlling the distance be tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal 56789 mi a amp EN ACC Set 032433098 Driver Override Xie cola ACC 55 mph 032433099 Driver Override To Cancel The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory if e You softly tap the brake pedal e You depress the brake pedal e You press the CANCEL switch e An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs e f the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off e You turn OFF the ignition ESC will automatically be re engaged To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed Adaptive NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of Cruise Control 20 mph 32 km h WARNING Cancelled 96789 mi The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set spee
103. with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle 412 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 1076 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extens
104. work properly Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed FUSES Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and relays N 072710829 Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 Fuse Fuse e When installing the integrated power module 1 Buse Spare cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop 2 40 Amp Radiator Fan dd erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so Ka Crean pee s may allow water to get into the integrated power 50 Amp Power Steering 1 failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to ia module and possibly result in an electrical system 30 Amp Starter Pink use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating 40 Amp Anti Lock Brakes The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated ae may result in a dangerous electrical system over m use Spare Joad Ita properly ae fuse continues to blow it p j Tne Spare indicates a problem in the circuit that must be a use Spare conecte EE 20 Amp All Wheel Drive Yellow Module If Equipped l 10 Amp Security Red 1 3 E 5 7 0 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse D E 10 Amp j Fus Spae SIUE j Fus Spae
105. you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Continued shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so 364 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing
106. 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Front Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp and Side Marker Lamp Models with Halogen Headlamps 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 CAUTION this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil an authorized dealer for service contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head dealer for service lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Fr
107. 289 Materials Added 413 Methanol sisie mis REG Rhe Rss 411 Octane Raun aic 4 x5 suba cedo 511 Saver Mode lt 4 6 cay UA we ee ESSA ESOS 294 Se ls srsti ax STRE S apenas 511 ide is AAR RE EET OR EENS 510 FUCLODUINIZER sersa ren EHE oa ee en DAS a pae 294 Er As IM RR DAE ONE EE OT EE IE es 294 LI uel Flexible xs Ro SERE RARR EL bes 415 Fuses nolo ma X ORI TEE EH EE OE N 496 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 247 Gasoline Fielies 30 30983 3 2898 HEDE 410 COBSGPUIHE ie REKE DEERE REELE 294 Gasoline Clean Air EE 411 Gasoline Reformulated 411 Gauges Coolant Temperature 4 4 6545 NEER Rh 283 Piel eens Ge wae RENE RU dee ee Us 280 Dpeedomelef esse Hod bok ee mb E ER 280 Ta MOE a aeo 93 oe oes d X acit 2 9 qe s Rr rrr nnm 356 Gear Select Lever Override 3 ccs asus 40052593 453 General Information 17 24 131 163 230 410 General Maintenance v oer meg r PS PE EE E 466 Glass Cleaning 12 9 cues See SUP Org SoS 495 Gross Axle Weight Rating oie see temer 422 425 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 422 424 OVAR PE 422 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water lis 362 Hazard Warning Flasher 24054 d e ees 438 Head Restraints 550 INDEX M Head onc VOS HB iis a RAS AE ERE ER E 477 ModS e M 507 AUtOmali 465 45 04 330 4 24 RIES a pen 190 Bulb Replacement 2 inn ode ee x emm d 506 Me
108. 33 5 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming NOTE If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure 6 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door 021835329 021835328 Child Protection Door Lock Function Child Protection Door Lock Location NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Remember that the rear doors can only be opened Instrument Panel for further information from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged e f wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sen
109. 442 443 Theft System Security Alarm 17 Lleol IES AP 395 Tip Steering CONN ai e act a a a a 202 203 Load Capati ss ESE EE eH 384 385 Time Delay Headlight 422222934 PARE SR SEN 191 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 400 Tire and Loading Information Placard 384 Pressure Warning LIglb sa sesde e Re ER 277 Tire Identification Number TIN 382 Quay OLIO 2 243 95 cise hen ba EROR 539 TEMO SS anui cus S edd qe ER EREE 379 Raidal phate afating S XR te eee ED EE 391 Tre Satety Informauon s 4545240549940 He 35 379 Replacement visa sie 545 eu DL 396 Rotation cl A T Tr gay eee ees 379 388 DIES eu p EE P PEOR eens ares ee ae EN 380 zuo lite 4244 6 Gag m 398 Opole Me Pr 440 PPh 424 oes toe eet a ERU AI aes ages 394 Trailer TOWING as cree e pP eee ve 431 Tread Wear Indicators ss se meta 54 sw 395 To Opin els 2445649286 N ER eee ESTO 188 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 428 TOWING TD M HM 424 Behind a Motorhome se aces dede CR a mis 436 Disabled Vehicle cia ach RS be RSS 455 top m 428 Recrealonal oats henge eee UE RV taris 436 rp AC mene as oon ee eb ee aes oe es 428 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 436 Ti ctom CODO sis exp ER qe Eu ooo ees of THE ION sees ERGER ELS ORE setae NO 424 Cooling Systemi IPS se esce e ded ge d 436 oi sco v esa FOR EEEE EPITEET EPIS 427 Minimum Requirements cs eas 429 PCT 434 Tr
110. 494 ES OR yeaa aetna E 21 W Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 202 H Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation 213 ll Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column O Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC 214 sa eee ae dts ee 209 Oo Activate eee 215 ll Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 204 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 216 W Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 235 o To Set A Desired ACC Speed Vo agcel 2 oues oe oe ee ae OE RE ee ee P O To Turn Off Hi To Resume Speed ien 2E REX ES S o To Vary The Speed Setting O Setting The Following Distance In ACC O Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu o Display Warnings And Maintenance O Precautions While Driving With ACC O General Information D Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode s xa REOR x3 ERR o Forward Collision Warning If Equipped 230 292 O Parksense Sensors llle 236 O Parksense Warning Display O Parksense Display 3 v duse Rr AES O Enabling And Disabling Parksense O Service The Parksense Rear Park Assist SCO ih eke eee hha ao oe esse eos eee 240 O Cleaning The Parksense System 240 O Parksense System Usage Precautions 240 ll Parkview Rear Back Up Camera IP Eouipped E 243 O Turning Parkview On Or Off With Touch Screen Radio a uw 40 03 2 sew as 245 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Mi Overhead Con
111. 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing AII Wheel Drive AWD Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 527 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service schedule 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 136 000 miles 221 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center m d Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 144 000 miles 234 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspe
112. 67 COMPAEN sisie ER DA prae Rd 461 462 Compartment Identification 461 Coolant Antifreeze Ln 481 511 SD A 480 Exhaust Gas Caution 85 414 IJ irae P 351 HOoOdSd SIAEDI uuo sescsseyescy sus 351 Pitel Requirements sees a ee do cut REK 410 JOD SNAG eh oup ARR Notus espe xg d Res 448 Multi Displacemient 2 22 ho es 366 OIL soas RAE Rs RR EET IS Rd 467 510 511 Oil Change Interval 624022464 es 293 468 Mike de pere sedo d rg on np iaiia 468 469 SIBI FMM I ee 470 Oil Filter Disposal ione dpPERIEERMRES RS 470 Oil Selection aua 344 339 43 x3 DE xa 468 510 Silii C rm 469 OVOCIU usua sofa PRESE E ALES P PNE 438 DUANE 348 Temiperatiite Guge sa ste gung bane Bles 283 Engine Oil Viscosity 005 468 469 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 69 Entry System Illuminated ooo es 20 Brhawol asse Pe ce ee eee sees ee NE ee 411 Event Data Recorder 234564464 Uh ee 4E PER 72 Exhaust Gas Caution eee 85 414 EXDSUSEDVSLel amas acies Bord m IS DRR RS 85 478 Exterior Folding MITOS aug esc coe Pun coeds 98 Exterior Lighting 4454245455 cena es Cea beers 189 PROP lights AR RE EET IT ER oa ness 88 Filler Location Puel senspaca eses RR 280 Filters Pui leser ce coco oS E PS ERR E AE a 470 Alt CONCIMOMING 4 veda vire Ker R 340 474 Puce Ol Mc 470 511 548 INDEX NEE Id Engine Ol Disposal 12 Rs RR KERKE SP EG 470 F
113. 96 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious inju
114. Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB X ge Il e An energy absorbing steering column and steering Trunk Emergency Release wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In an accident you and y
115. Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the e button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Also you can press the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the End soft key or the button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press the amp button and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call en
116. Boxes 538 e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com N FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 539 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRAD
117. COSMY GaGaucre EE TEE ea 468 469 510 Onboard Diagnostic System 463 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 247 Operating Preca tions used 44 4 54 4 ERST RES 463 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 N INDEX 555 Outside Rearview Mirrors llle 97 Overhead Console eee eee 245 Overheating ENGINE sccis ae ind OUD a di 284 438 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 537 POI T sign hha re Geo eee pee ae Re 491 PAC AE usce pee Pee R4 DRS AAS OR ER SR 29 Park Sense System Reat 12225 RPO 424 45 290 Parke DIG vuaesduweraipesceEs SAO ID ees 366 Passie DA Db 4 0 sane dedi BIS SA EER DE dart d RES 194 Pedal Adjustable ii cac sop Bs ne oo AE DE ME 206 Anm 84 Placard Tire and Loading Information 384 Power Deck Lid Release 000 42 Distribution Center Fuses 496 500 Door Locks x Stan dene RUE ee ba EROS ES 29 MIOS 95495109 664 654 5 6n9 4 8 e445 RES 99 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 297 ALLE ETE OOR ee ee ES 171 OOO sarrere rear bee RA EUER OO 365 SUDTODE ge eee wae tunes PROPER E ee es 253 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 203 WINDOWS soe ELE EE ET ER EDE 39 Power Steering Floid loose wies RED amos 512 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 56 Preparation for Jacking llle 442 Pretensioners Deal DENG uo resti n are pota ere dod dd de 54 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry css s
118. Continued 414 STARTING AND OPERATING xe CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition WARNING malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly some light smoke your engine may be out of tune Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon or malfunctioning and may require immediate monoxide poisoning service Contact your authorized dealer for service e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon assistance monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can e The use of fuel additives which are now being kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as sold as octane enhancers is not recommended a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the Most of these products contain high concentra engine running for an extended period If the tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine performance problems resulting from the use of running for more than a short period adjust the such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the manufacturer the vehicle Continued NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 415 WARNING Continued CAUTION e Guard
119. D OPERATING M NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e f the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the
120. E FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE e Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions e Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the memory function Use either the memory recall switch or the RKE transmitter if linked to the memory feature to recall memory positions 1 or 2 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The mem
121. ES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 540 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee Temperature Grades WARNIN
122. EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmi
123. G The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 542 INDEX M OU Your Drakes 444443 ERAS i o gag 2995 366 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 369 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 211 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 482 lelie Fuel 22a wx 3 ded RR ED Vie q Ets 418 Adding Washer PUI 2a e opo tope dne 477 Additives Fuel 4 ia see dane ES pees ee 413 Adjustable Pedals x4 xx nes bee MR RR gee 206 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 470 Air Conditioner Maintenance 473 sur Cond UuoBInDn2 INCE s voee sae i
124. G THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cush ion This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield 032036861 Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF Y
125. G uis eaves HER PERO d Ver 98 Heated 644 64 oom eben RE Oe eee Me E Outside Rearview 554 INDEX NEE Id is ORE EE OT OE SETEL 100 Mode Fuel Savei 4 405 4 pado UE EN 294 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 2 scere 400 Mopar Faris sa watse snye pur reges dod edd 465 536 NMIBE7E TBE 922x392 ed ans eie IM owes 3 411 Multi Displacement Engine System 366 Multi Function Control Lever 193 Navigation System Uconnect gps 243 New Vehicle Break In Period 84 Occupant Restraints 00 44 65 69 Occupant Restraints Sedan 60 61 65 68 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 511 Odometer AR EA NE AAR bo ee ee eS ae 276 Oil Change Indicator 424 954 6754 ea YF 276 293 Oil Change Indicator Reset 276 293 Oil Filler Cane a dis 3d do 65 seek cane tees 470 Oil Filter Selection es 4526626545404 RS 470 UN Brode 455040 oe25 a5 4 deam IEEE 467 511 deor AC M 510 Change Interval a does eme eet ER cae 293 468 CWCCKING 4o3544 5 64t eee ae hae ee RP E 467 Dip sis o444as s ARMES SEE es 467 BE MATE hae EE ETER tS RS Owes 470 Filer 5 Gags eee a oe eee ees oe eee ees 470 511 Filter Disposal 4440 RM RR Sooo eae 470 Identiese OSG a xa eue o 9 rdc qo tieus 468 Materials Added to 0 469 Recommendation 0 4 468 510 DVOCICUC Grad sae 4 eee ee tee ae ae RAE 469 MIS
126. HICLE ie If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Refer to Child Restraints Assistance You should read the instructions provided with your WARNING child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more All hould al heir houl occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder severe injuries in a collision The air bags work belts properly with your seat belt to restrain you properly In The driver and front passenger seats should be moved some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Always wear your seat belts even though you have Bags room to inflate air bags Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle Continued has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate
127. IES 453 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Remove the rubber tray from the storage bin located to the right of the shift lever The override access port is near the bottom of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate 3 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the 5 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position m tab through the access port on the center con 6 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 7 Reinstall the rubber tray into the storage bin With Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped If the engine is running press the START STOP button to turn it off Release the brake pedal and press the START SIOP button once or twice to go to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine Then follow the in structions shown above to activa
128. If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure 406 STARTING AND OPERATING M The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IS The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire wat the low tire pressure values flashing Tir xis m ae N a usau i us EN 819793fc ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 Should this occur you should stop as soon
129. NDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Voice Tree Uconnect Voice Command AM FM Satellite Radio available commands These commands can be spoken when the AM FM or Satellite radio is playing after pushing the Uconnect voice command button Commands only available Commands available in Commands only available in AM FM mode mode in Satellite mode 3 Audio will Audio will Audio will Audio will Audio will change to 950 change to the change to the change to change to AM AM or FM next Satellite Satellite station Satellite frequency or Rock Stations 80 s on 8 Channel 8 Satellite Channel stored in preset 5 Notes 1 You can replace 950 AM with any other AM or FM frequency such as 98 7 FM 2 You can replace Rock with any of the satellite music types 3 You can replace B s on 8 with any other satellite station name received by the Radio 4 You can replace 8 with any other satellite station name received by the Radio 030536631 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Hands Free Music Control These commands can be spoken when playing music from your SD card USB device CD or iPod after pushing the Uconnect voice command bufon Radio will play the jeer ae ee Podcast Weekly Jekyll and Mr Auto Podcast Hyde Radio will play the Radio will play ded a the genre Rock Radio will play Radio will play the album the Artist Scott ragtime favorites Joplin Radio will
130. NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 9 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
131. NING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System Touch the Controls soft key then touch the Heated Steering Wheel soft key to turn on the heated steering Wheel Press the Heated Steering Wheel soft key a second time to turn the heated steering wheel off 10 10 NW 54 ou 4 1130 Controls Soft Key Controls Driver Passenger Heated N 7 Sont Heated Steering Wheel Soft Key NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on UNDERSTANDIN
132. NOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedure in Starting And Operating for further information Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch START STOP Oy 3 ENGINE Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an em
133. Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro vide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Sec
134. OUR VEHICLE 207 e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control sys WARNING tem is on The following messages will be displayed Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In You could lose control and have an accident Always formation System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjust able Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control right side of the steering wheel system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate A Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator light in wW g the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will Poe illu
135. Outgoing Calle Xj 248 990 6543 Xj James Buttler Sf D Dennett e Incoming Calls e Outgoing Calls e Missed Calls 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e All Calls These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the amp button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To ignore the call touch the Ignore soft key on the touch screen You can also touch the answer soft key or touch the blue caller ID box Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the phone amp e button answer soft key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can on
136. RNDL area To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch m ul gt 033333449 Ambient Light N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 Dimmer Controls The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel Dimmer Switches With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the left dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders if equipped Rotating the right dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the door handle lights and map pockets Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This fe
137. RT STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will 350 STARTING AND OPERATING ee display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFE ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays ACC e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays RUN e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended
138. Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Automatic Temperature Control ATC ATC Hard keys are located in the center of the instru ment panel Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 9 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons 6 7 10 11 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect Touch System Set tings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up
139. S J27 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 327 CONSERVING Puel ses kas dex Rd eed ae een 294 Console Floor 25s AGE 4 HR EER eae ae ee 265 Console Overhead ea Lemon 245 Contract Servi e vos comte Eu a rede ERU HE eek 535 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 483 COONS System aede darc s ax eorr See coe ves 480 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 482 Coclan Gand 4 ics cuc Panda deo hee eee 510 Coolant Level 22 469 4544404443444 481 484 Disposal of Used Coolant 484 Drain Flush and Refill 481 liie seno P ee aa 484 Points to Remember ss 485 Pressure Cap uos o opse Me DOER Ke HEER 483 Radiator Cap sie BERRY Ud HS oa os 483 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 481 510 511 Corrosion Protection eee 491 Cruise Control Speed Control 211 CONDO s cee eure neer 262 496 Customer Assistance eser 533 Data Recorder Event aaa 72 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 198 Daytime Running Lights 5 552245 HER AD 192 Dealer Service leen 465 Deck Lid Emergency Release au re nhe 43 Deck Lid Power Release 42 Defroster Rear Window 269 Defroster Windshield 87 336 Delay Intermittent Wipers 199 Diagnostic System Onboard isses b mmn 463 Dimmer Switch Headlight 0 194 Dipsticks Oil Engine Di
140. SHELD LT PAREL SEAT BELT aue Doel lr M us a VALE eme 1 TEW FAUL cingi BEF MOST iLi Ld kd TEER oe dog vd da T AR 9 a O0 SZ n oC ds LOW GLOW PG POWER verdrag D Wins OF ASA ABA SLiDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTEI MO ETER FOR UCCONNWEET HAZARD FOUS WHEEL ATEUENO FLU AWO WASHER RELEASE HANDLE Fi AAEM ATEN purTON sre Low C B E SRS X A um m k r AIC AIRBAG pve Ii 2 PUSH OFF BALTES TION THis GORE DOM AMT SI PLEMENTAL PABRSENDER Done LAS GOAVERTSLE CONVERTIELE HEE OVERS Am EL amp CTTID INDICATOR LHGHT DIL TEMP TEMPESATURS RESTRAINTSYETEM AlRAAG OFF TOP DOH TOP UF M MR FACE CUONTHTIOWER STABILITY CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 010805185 VIN Location The vehicle identification number VIN is also located on the right front strut
141. Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position 3 Within 60 seconds of cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Cycle the ignition to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully com pleted the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully
142. Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side air bags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SAB Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehi
143. Soon Light BOA 4 4 5 64 GLEE RE EE HET ET 171 Malfunction Indicator 664466465 4244 5944 lt His EDY oie rek cage en ER eee a4 106 Service Manuals aa oes RS E Pes memes Head Restraints ss 20154 SERE a dire es 16 Smi Lever Override 2445 2 vicars ee ER EIAS Feared xa iori e PSP ERR DP KERE EDE T OMUNO ou sid ee SR OES ESE DE eR Is ed ic Heieht Adjustment ss seke REKE DRR HE E 171 Automatic Transmission hun T i 183 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 558 INDEX NEE id Shoulder Belts is uk 46243 4054 448 4 448 EER 46 ideas oi EE EER HR DE 68 ione MU sux oe es RR CP dE N DE 88 193 275 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 361 SmartBeams 2339299 Xm A anb al ee Eu AS 190 Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 397 SNOW DS wo oaks BU US Rae oe DEERE westi 398 PEIE skaak RS SERS ete ane ee 392 393 440 POU PES Sexe ETE EE OE EE ae oa 511 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 410 511 Oil 244455685 6 ey SE Eee ess 511 Speed Control Cruise Control 207 211 verter PP 280 xri P Soe 25 348 Automatic Transmission 348 Cold Weather 4 244 uREERGER RESO S 350 Pog ne fals to SAL ho EERDER DE DS 90 Remote sei SFE Geb ad a Ee ER ees 29 Startno and CISEIRDD a5 45 en boa 939524 ED 348 Staring Procedures ia o2 s5 54546524 ERROR RR 348 Steering Column Controls 62 gt son acon dt eee es 193 Col LOCK osse aoe aoa wale a ichs 202 VOWED a64
144. The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator 2 AWD All Wheel Drive Indicator If Equipped The AWD indicator will illuminate when All Wheel Drive AWD is activated 3 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park 0Q lights or headlights are turned on 4 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 5 Turn Signal Indicators Ca The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 6 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal reg
145. UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Personal Settings Linked To FOB If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection t
146. VEHICLE M If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight sec
147. VIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e The Ignition Off time is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 d EEN CAUTION Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS l power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the There are three 12 Volt 13 Amps electrical power outlets system will need to be replaced on this vehicle The power outlets are protected by a fuse Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets for use to ensure proper operation outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only WARNING when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position
148. W Load Leveling System If Equipped 2 0 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature will be defaulted on and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse 030407085 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 030436523 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will
149. YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poi sonous when inhaled and cause you and others to be severely injured or killed NOTE Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes sage states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked
150. a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the
151. able DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Rear Head Restraints ders The center rear head restraint has two positions up or 0309074909 down When the seat is being occupied the head restraint should raised When there are no occupants in the center seat position the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver Push Button N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head NOTE The outboard head restraints are not adjustable restraint To lower the head restraint press the push Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know button located at the base of the head restraint and push Before Starting Your Vehicle for tether routing downward on the head restraint Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area To fold the rear seatback pull on 3 the loops located on the upper seatback Push Button 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE These loops can be tucked away when not in use t 22092997 When the seatback is folded to the upright position make Rear Seatback Loop sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the After releasing the seatback it can be folded forward seatback above the seat strap NN UNDERSTANDING TH
152. above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021341332 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when t
153. adlight Off Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Illuminated Approach Touch the Illuminated Approach soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlights With Wipers Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key to change this display When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Auto High Beams Touch the Auto High Beams soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the a
154. after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 NOTE e The SmartBeam system can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay fea
155. against carbon monoxide with proper Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected Si ie wat operate on E 85 every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un Blaed6a9 leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles E 85 Badge 416 STARTING AND OPERATINC See Ethanol Fuel E 85 When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full WARNING e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when fueli Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could Ee cause serious personal injury Never have any smok you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when filling a period of at least 5 minutes the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning
156. agent and Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard never use it near an open flame starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with NOTE an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of e When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C these two For best results a refueling pattern that you may experience hard starting and rough idle alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be following start up even if the above recommendations avoided are followed eee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer re quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines U
157. ailer and Tongue Weight 428 orn APR ETT 433 Trader Towing Guide as em ordo ey vow e 428 Maier VEL Id aas iot ya tages 9 gare aed en ed 428 Taneler dcc ana ed EA OER ORR nm 490 ini CL 490 512 Maintenance Leur qoare OR MES HARE 490 ATAMSMMSSION 425 36 2 RE Ew 3 8 gee dep s oS 488 AOMaAa uus aed RE BUR EHS ddr 352 355 488 Igi ie os ie ae HAS RR HR EG ap 512 Range Indicator sy ous hehe se cht ng 39 35 5 356 viet iig rr eeu gen See 99 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Bnlfy 20245084 Ee RS eR ERES 29 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entity adesse adero ses 20 D EEEEERILSIIIIIIIIUGIIIIIILLLLLUUILHLIIIUSIGI I GU GU B CKCEL AISLAALLLEALOLIL LL LA ARL ILLUIBUMGUGuqd INDEX 561 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 247 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 diepere Pets aane 23 39 8 ends ans aod d MA 84 Tread Wear Indicators ss i 02 on o pm doe mn 395 His Ode Ete cues a an a vota cba eee ages 276 Trunk Lid Deck Lid so EERS ELE ERROR EDS 42 43 Trunk Release Remote Control 42 Trunk Release Emergency 6 22 sccheeune cans 43 TOP oudl ie oos oen Saw eae wages qe 193 275 UTL ONNE sop Rice n yw EE 9d e 327 Uniform Tire Quality Grades issu 539 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 327 Universal Transmitter sc o 2954 sdk RE da 247 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 51 Vanity Mirrors 20044 4446445044 derd SP 100 Vehicle Cert
158. ained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
159. an 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 Front Map Reading Lights Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either e side of the console These buttons are backlit for night The front map reading lights are mounted in the over Nes besd AE time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a l second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed J P a L3 1 2 w 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights 031433151 Front Map Reading Light Switches 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Ambient Light Interior Lights The overhead console is equipped with an ambientlight The interior lights come on when a door is opened feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil ity of the floor center console and P
160. an 23 4 vox eines ee a Eu x ees oe es 494 Delay Pm 191 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 194 lights On Reminder 2 eREkeRRR RE m3 192 On With Vels su vee yu EO ver rd 190 200 iS EE EE N 194 SVAN 4 2u eo eae ewe een eS eae oe ae Ges 189 Time Deli ysis eae ead AAR REPRE RC 191 Washers AT AA o bes ok EE ee es 477 Heated NIORS xaxa 650655844 ERA ER dowd 100 Heated Seats llli 174 Heater Engine Block 22s ia o RA 9544 REOR 352 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 194 Hill Start Assist nnana aaa 375 Hitches Taller TONE Pr 427 Holder COM o cac kde a ddie Be Ree Ru eS 265 Holder CUD aeu ee pod MR Rd ae eons OER SN 262 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 247 Hood Release cash scare doe ehh HOO OS Se d 188 Ignition NC ee see od EO Va RESENSEER ee aq 12 Iumunaled ER duces rear oe tied Re dote ma 20 Immobilizer ens IS BY vas sin ma DERS 9m 15 Infant Restraint 2 su 45 cepa OE RS S SURE 73 74 Information Center Vehicle 285 Inside Rearview Mirror se se se 96 Tsttatent Cluslet uade axe HER PARE 275 Instrument Panel and Controls 273 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 495 Integrated Power Module Fuses 496 Interior Appearance Care cnn cee ee Rew dna 494 N INDEX 551 MOr USCS au rives RR RE ES E 496 Inte OP DIS MAR OE EO ee as oe Ee 196 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 199 INMOGHCHON uoce hx wa xxu Rd x RS ER
161. anchor positions directly behind Tether Strap Mounting the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook strap 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED
162. and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Mes sages Trip Info Vehicle Speed and Turn Menu OFF and sub menus mmm EE SELECT Button EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus sub menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset features 040909599 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 BACK Button Press the BACK button to scroll back to a BACK previous menu or sub menu Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC display consists of four sections 1 The top line where compass direction and outside temperature are displayed 2 The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed 3 The vehicle odometer line 4 The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom eter line The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition
163. and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Passive Entry Keyless Enter N Go Touch the Passive Entry soft key to change this display This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Heated Seats e Auto Heated Seats Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Engine Off Options e Easy Exit Seats If Equipped Touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key to change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key and select ON or OFF The
164. aptive Cruise Con Red trol E NETS Fuse spare 49 Fuse Spare EN 50 Fuse Spare EBEN 20 Amp Front Heated Seats 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats Yellow Natural Steering Wheel 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 10 Amp Heated Cupholders 63 Fuse Spare Red Rear Heated Seat 64 25 Amp Rear Windows Switches Natural 10 Amp HVAC Module In 10 Amp Airbag Module Red Car Temperature Sen Red Puse Spare 67 15 Amp Run Sense Blue Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 10 Amp Airbag Module Red Puse Spare Puse Spare jFuse Spare Fuse Spare NL sal Blue Sunshade Fuse Spare Fuse Spare N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is st
165. are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements NS 1A TING AND OPERATING 427 Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Industry Standards Class II Medium Dut 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4 540 Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 428 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note 3 6L Au
166. arted again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578 Visor Vanity lamps s acp doro sioe doc ck mes A6220 Glove Box Lamp If Equipped x sak seke bk 194 Door Courtesy os se tease does iret PER ss 562 Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam Headlamp Standard Halogen H11 Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge HED PC D35 Serviced at Authorized Dealer High Beam Headlamp suu sack qa au quie fe m Bo ds 9005 Front Park Dan Lamp vae dor ESSE 3157A Front Fog Lamp If Equipped PSXQAW Front Side Marker ies cea eo mda DR ee Ai 168 Rear Tod Lamp accu ian SEN do bros 9 don EED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Stop Turn Lamp deae aanak LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear ide VERSES os asus cow E bee ELDER ES 168 Backup Lamp sis os EER ha en MOS aed anb 9157 Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Es AAR AE AE SE OS Oe eee EE
167. as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure inflation value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not ro a received Fr fa SA ar EER CL a n pem WT 5 i Ex Bass ae M Fi 81979401 408 STARTING AND OPERATING M If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequen
168. at you do not exceed the maximum front de EE ay or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can e Type of Vehicle result if either rating is exceeded You could lose e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH control of the vehicle and have a collision ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
169. ature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the park ing lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position The lever is located on the left side of the steering column Windshield Wiper Washer Control 031439995 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Windsh
170. back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Fuel Saver Display In Cluster The ECO message is located in the instrument cluster display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to clo
171. be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 390 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then
172. be included if equipped E Lg 033333450 Overhead Console 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Map Reading Lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility a Tl 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed Sunglass Bin Door At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close J PS S TT L FX 7 033333448 Sunglass Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console designating the different HomeLink channels 034033576 HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
173. be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently You can choose from HI LO or OFF heat settings Amber indica tor lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI one for LO and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HI level heating Press the switch a second time to select LO level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE e Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes e The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HI level If the HlI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LO level
174. ble Service Radar Sensor 96789 mi ACC FCW Unavailable Warning 032433104 Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly Turns And Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves ACC may occasionally provide braking and or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary This may be the system s response to signs guardrails and other station ary objects in a curve This may also occur at the base of steep hills This is normal operation and your vehi
175. brakes when you need them and could have an collision Continued Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg STARTING AND OPERATING 433 The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations WARNING Continued e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision gt O Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring O C Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size 4 gt O stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety ot Oa O The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har 057003766 ness and connector Four Pin Connector o 1 Female Pins 4 Park Winng harness 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 434 STARTING AND OPERATING O CN O O O o Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes Towing Tips Before setting ou
176. button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter e Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation e Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exter
177. ce fluid loss or transmission malfunction have conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe CAUTION damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu fluid level accurately facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper other than that recommended by the manufacturer maintenance intervals will result in more frequent fluid and filter If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu fluid and filter should be changed ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Continued 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and front differential The exterior surface of these compo nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible The transfer case fluid fill inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing To inspect the transfer case fluid level remove the fill inspection plug The fluid level should be
178. ch equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS and the Electronic Stability Control ESC All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions Also your vehicle is equipped with Hill Start Assist HSA Ready Alert Braking and Rain Brake Support Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The
179. ch screen allows you to control the following call Dial By Saying A Number features e Press the button to begin e Answer e End e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e Ignore e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number e Hold unhold 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Mute unmute Transfer the call to from the phone e Press the amp button to begin owap 2 active calls e After the Listening prompt and the following beep f e Join 2 active calls together say Call John Doe Mobile e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Touch Tone Number Entry e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Dial soft key e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the amp vR button while in a call and say Send 12347 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types 68 4 tP FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Ww 72 Recent calls gt All Cal gt 4 A R AL 7 Ana Conda 7 Axel Schweiss SJ Buddy s Pizza Incoming Calls
180. cies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire
181. cle does not require service 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM Using ACC On Hills Lane Changing When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and mance may be limited it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There will not be suffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary General Information FCC Requirements For V
182. cle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup o Y It also include
183. connect Touch System 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Soft keys Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 A C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON If equipped with ATC performing this function will cause the automatic operation to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator will turn off 2 Recirculation Control Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation if equipped with ATC The speeds can be selected using either hard heys or soft keys as follows Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 Soft key Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Press the blower soft key to enter the blower setting screen Once in the blower settings screen use the UP and DOWN arrows to adjust the blower speed setting or directly select the speed setting by pressing the blower bar area around the blower icon The blower speed increases as you press the UP arrow or move clockwise on the setting scale and
184. ct Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconn
185. ction to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commands ean ee Spoken from any screen aller pushing We Liconmect Prone Bilan Available commands while phone call is in progress This umrmirnds Gin fea piken from iny screen wha a coll rs aarde als pushing Ihe Lesnnoc veloe command buibor Search for John Smith x Shows the l Number 3 Dial Tones for ass cialed number ar Incoming Incoming phonebook Number bs Dial Tones ere cy In phone number or call Fist will TEC entry for Jahn for 12342 4 z with entry is dialed Voicemail dialed dialed is phone k be shown j Smith wiih all are sent regant ar most redialed dial stored le numbers Noles 7 in replace Jahn Sri with an nama e vuaer maille ae Banas phone bdok You can eso Say Call John Smith and use system will aSk yau which phone nummer you war bo call Far dolis Sraith aL Vou Gin regiae Mobile wilh Hormen pras os Ones d Vou tin n s an rodni sides wath alaia dll need GIE cuc nal ciuis 4
186. d 03243400 that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation This could cause a collision and or serious injury Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to in crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to de crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h NOTE e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power
187. d e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions e Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C e Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position NOTE Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 031736847 Tilt Steering Lever To unlock the steering column pull the lever downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desire
188. d To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column Power Tilt Telescoping Switch To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WAR
189. d boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for front axle fluid All Wheel Drive damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary AWD M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 523 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 524 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 3 6L Engine Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary T Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Insp
190. d cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed EL ES C E XE 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 401 The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
191. d in the rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from the rear bumper fascia ParkSense provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is mal functioning the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SEN SORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM mes sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS appears in the EVIC and the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction see your authorized dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see your authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper i
192. d the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition is cycled off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might g
193. d the vehicle is in e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis motion connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires You or others can be badly burned by hot engine disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If testing or for prolonged periods during very rough you see or hear steam coming from under the idle or malfunctioning operating conditions hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the enti
194. d to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET S button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped To recall the memory settings for driver 1 press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver 2 press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A r
195. d with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 369 CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated
196. de e ACC Proximity Warning e ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur Clean Radar Sensor in Front of Vehicle FCW OFF Clean Radar Sensor Warning 032433103 NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens e Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and requi
197. de with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may increase NOTE For Manual Climate Controls while operating in other airflow modes than Defrost the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass 13 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in 5ync will automatically exit this feature 14 Temperature Control Manual Temperature Control Only Press the temperature soft key to regulate the tempera ture of the air inside the passenger compartment Moving the temperature bar into the red area indicates warmer temperatures Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 button to turn
198. decreases when press the DOWN arrow or move counter clockwise on the setting scale Soft key Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 4 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode if equipped The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 5 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Continued 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Continued e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp
199. ditions How To Use Remote Start 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected All of the following conditions must be met before the life of the battery is a minimum of three years engine will remote start 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station e Shift lever in PARK tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios e Doors closed REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED e Hood dosed This system uses the Key Fob with Remote x2 Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle Trunk closed HAZARD switch off 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE PANIC button not pressed System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active Ignition in OFF position WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Continued away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The foll
200. does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle e The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop e The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 3 032433101 Distance Set To change the distance setting press the Distance button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting adjusts between long medium and short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will th
201. doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Runnin
202. drive has been turned off 21 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first tumed to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 22 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly
203. ds or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phoneis e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your operational you may reach the emergency number as chances of successfully making a phone call as to that follows for the mobile phone directly e Press the button to begin WARNING e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country Towing Assistance where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and If you need towing assistance Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to th
204. e e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe dista
205. e It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability STARTING AND OPERATING 419 4 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open 5 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 6 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door 056810781 Fuel Filler Door 3 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system 420 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE Afunnel is provided located in the trunk in the spare tire area to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula CAUTION tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a Fuel Funnel portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling STARTING AND OPERATING 421 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 3 Pull the rel
206. e Uconnect Phone e Press the button to begin 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the EVR button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the EvR button a
207. e Add to Favorites f 248 123 4567 68 4 tP FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out We 72 Phonebook Fa ot F 248 456 7891 ra e Voicemail mm 248 577 6215 erm Add from Mobile EJ Favorites Empty Mom s Cell Emergency Towing Assistance NOTE If the Favorites list is full you will be asked to remove an existing favorite 3 From the Phone main screen select phonebook From the phonebook screen select the Favorites soft key and then select the soft key located to the right of the e To remove a Favorite select phonebook from the phonebook record Select an empty entry and touch the Phone main screen on that selected entry When the Options pop up appears To Remove A Favorite 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i e Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and then touch the Options soft key e Touch the next to the Favorite you would like to remove 68 44 tP FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Wb 72 Phonebook gt e ER Mobile E Voicemail Remove from Favs Favorites a Buddy s Pizza r Mom s Cell Emergency e The Options pop up will display touch Remove from Favs Emergency And Towing Assistance The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only be altered These cannot be deleted and the names cannot be changed To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these steps e Touch the Phonebook soft key from the Pho
208. e Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location Jc 5 LH RICS gages SPS A ROE Tett JTITCHERIWEETEEMVWIEILIISERV ER NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 1 on the driver s side B Pillar 2 T125 70D15 3 420kPa 60PSI 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX
209. e air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat includ ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If itis necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on fo
210. e brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func tions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty DTE e Miles Per Gallon MPG Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Average Fuel Economy ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display This icon will appear whenever the Multi Displacement System MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are
211. e front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or WARNING slouching can move the belt out of position e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back actly when installing an infant or child restraint NOTE For additional information refer to A rearward facing child restraint should only be www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy site for additional information http www tc gc ca ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that i
212. e have been pre loaded in the phonebooks Commands such as Call Emergency and Call towing assistance will call the comesponding number stoned woth those contacts Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030538628 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 General Information Uconnect Phone supports the following features This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 Voice Activated Features e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the e Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming user s authority to operate the equipment SMS messages e This device may not cause harmful interference e Hands Free text messaging Send a message to John Smiths Mobile e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired e Redialing last dialed numbers Redial operation e Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Uconnect Phone Back Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav e View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show vehicle communications syste
213. e light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist then the system will provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool STARTING AND OPERATING 365 If the SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM el message and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP mes sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature con dition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 366 STARTING AN
214. e rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solut
215. e the shift lever out of the PARK position the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before the shift lock will release Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in the DRIVE or REVERSE position WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK press the ENGINE START STOP button to turn off the engine and apply the parking brake Once the ENGINE START STOP button is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the DRIVE position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal operation Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System Thi
216. e tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Jack Warning Label Continued 444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 2 If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle 3 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 060641515 Front Jacking Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 445 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near
217. e topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Uconnect Voice Command VR button Uconnect Voice Commands The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are avail able at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect Voice Command VR button 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Changing the Volume Starting Voice Recognition VR Session in Radio Player Modes 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command In this mode you can say the following commands EVR button NOTE The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Command amp vR button volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command Disc system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Jo didtehedisemode sar Ohne cures io Dia Voice Command is different than the audio system ME This command can be given in any mode or screen 2 Say a command e g Help e Track t to change the track U
218. e vehicle is in a As Bag is marked with an air bag label sewn into the SE severe enough to cause the air bag to Outboard side of the front seats inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side 81265aa6 es Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC
219. eaks and all parts for front axle fluid All Wheel Drive damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary AWD Inspect the transfer case fluid AII Wheel Drive AWD M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MANTENANCE SCHEDULES 519 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center m m Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper loosene
220. ease cable If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the trunk 2 Remove the access cover located on the left side inner trim panel Release Cable VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Access Cover 422 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Vehicle Certification Label The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load the rear of the driver s door must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR The label contains the following information Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles e Month and year of manufacture evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR rear GAWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front WARNING e Name of manufacturer e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is de EE EG Namber ViN important th
221. ecall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 on the driver s door during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped stop mov ing A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver s seat moves depends on where you have the driver s seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver s seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver s seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver s seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver s seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop T
222. ect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating t
223. ect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the transfer case fluid All Wheel Drive AWD O C O O O O C C O L LLE Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 525 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter J Flush and replace engine coolant at Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 00 km or 60 months Inspect the front s
224. ed place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e f your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e Youcan also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system N WHATTODOI NEMERGENCIES 439 CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
225. ed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch User s Manual STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the
226. ed to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation 378 STARTING AND OPERATING Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation
227. ee0e8eeRaauneeedag ee DEE Di 365 Tu COMME soe um eenbeawe ce riria 202 203 Wheel Heated 0 008 204 AV heel Db woohoo de EE ewes ES 202 203 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 927 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System CONDOS 424440646654 Fa Vedi bs d Ron RE RE 927 ME A C 265 505 Orage Veldel exu gc sob RE eI SE 339 505 DOT ES OUr velde lt ersat d dac de oud ene Rea DE 505 DUCK LIONS osugiere FR CA ER eden HEER 452 jui es see ERROR EE io Hie 299 DEDOS lasses Orage SRSA pur bU KEER ES 246 Sunroof Maintenance 4 614 0 46 64 6842 Aud dopo dd 256 N c DGw PWELJ 2 29 00 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag JEU PC tous ee RE OE 88 388 539 oway Control Trailer s sexe RE as titii ees 425 Aging eor les issue Tee eb REKE 395 DU Mine Bro e Ol s pas Aare RES Age 469 ATE sie HAS Ge he EER 388 System Remote Starting ois eren om t EE RES 25 ru cerir eiaei OE EE HER OS 397 CUNEO 44754 604 eo de X92 AT KA 439 443 geni E 2 5 Compact Pale seen eter ash PRE REED 292 Telescoping Steering Column x aces rere Res 202 203 Ee in 35245444425 EE ETES 439 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 338 General Information 388 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 283 439 Te Speed ne a tance v qupd wee AR oe es 391 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 77 Inflation Pressures seen 389 Theft Alarm Security Alarm euescsoe 44 ace a om 17 Jack es aya EE hoe ee eee
228. eed NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer To Vary The Speed Setting There are two ways to change the set speed e Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the desired speed and press the SET button e Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments respec tively Hold the RES or SET button for 5 mph 8 km h increments To Cancel The system will disable normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if e You softly tap or depress the brake pedal e You press the CANCEL button 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button e You turn off the ignition e You switch off ESC If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last driver setting ACC or Normal Cruise Control Forward Collision Warning If Equipped Forward Collision Warning FCW warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision FCW monitors the information from
229. een selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Settings After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the
230. ehicle When Stuck se 452 Rotation Tires 22 85 4 dw E doom vox Sea 299 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle s aie mtm ys 86 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 88 Safety Detects Reporting 445564554508 aoe ts 536 Safety Information Tire 2 2 osse e 379 Dalely IPS eree d dur ER doe ee E 04 Safety Exhaust GaS ss de e 062484 ERE 85 Schedule Maintenance eee 514 N INDEX 557 Seat belt Maintenance sit 2 443404 e454 SR 495 ke MERE N OE OOS ETE EG 171 beat belt Reminder i 4404404 44 oe ee oe ee end 54 Rear oe AR EET AE ER eniti pri 181 Seat Belis saree eiia OAAR EEN ESE 44 46 86 Seatback Release iua xut derer ed 181 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 51 TAGS RE E E ees 171 And Pregnant Women 22x Rue 3 vh does 56 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Child Restraint 73 74 75 82 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 481 511 PxfenGer ss ope eau eee OAR AAS SARA AD 50 Selecon Or Od issu soper dacs severe ses pe 468 Front Seat SS ee 46 47 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 0 15 late eo sues vy e ve ESD E oes ey sess 06 Deniy Key Programming os dees 499 99 apu ns 17 Operating Instructions 2 usas ders o nope s 47 Sentry Key Replacement 16 PECtCNSIONGKS ier 05099 9098 Ee Oar DETVE ASSISE ue Sucesos Nur VR e perc DERDE D59 celo C 46 Servic Contract uos doa a RM Sache SE KAR DAAR 535 Unbwist ng Procedure uus sacas gem as 5 Service Engine
231. ehicular Radar Systems Classification Specifications 47 C ER Part 15 47 C ER Part 15 515 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir ing the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h To change modes press the MODE button when the system is in either the OFF READY or SET position Cruise Ready will be displayed if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position Cruise Off will be N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position To switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode press the MODE button a second time WARNINCG In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to vehicle distance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set sp
232. elts are fastened BeltAlert triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph 8 km h The reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until the respective seat belts are NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until front belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illumi nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert Programming NOTE Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de activating the BeltAlert The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following proce dure 1 With all doors closed and the ignition in any position I except ON RUN buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine Wait for the
233. em so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror
234. en maintain the set distance until e The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 24 km h and the system automatically disengages itself N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 e The distance setting is changed e The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead w S 032433102 Brake Alert Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC ACC SET Or Crui
235. en the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 19 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp c
236. enience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibil ity to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always re quired while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming ve hicles and stationary objects e g a stopped ve hicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Continued 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued WARNING Cannot take street traffic and weather conditions You should switch off the ACC system into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions Does not predict the lane curvature or the move ment of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes e When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations e g in highway construction zones When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are winding icy snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes When circumstances do not allow safe driving at
237. er Status The shift lever status PR N D L 6 5 4 3 2 1 are dis played indicating the shift lever position Telltales 6 5 4 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged and the gear selected is dis played For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Operating e Electronic Speed Control ON This light will turn on when the electronic SE speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This light will turn on when the ACC is ON R5 For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This light will turn on when the ACC is SET For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF FCW This light warns the driver of a potential colli sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the OFF driver
238. er associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The vr button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command imme diately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the vr button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More soft key then touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconne
239. eration conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 515 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M
240. ergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park ing 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020241333 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect Touch system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING CAUTION e When leaving the vehicle always HUE the key An unlocked car is an invitation
241. ergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Thi
242. erial to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not
243. erstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and or the transfer case DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels 362 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of
244. ery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage yo
245. es 20 Racially Wes PM M 391 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 483 Radio Operation sie REY HARDER EER 6402 4 929 Radio Remote Controls os 2 45 0545 64494644 RES 927 Rain Sensitive Wiper System esce RT RIEG 200 Rear Camera 556 INDEX M Rear Cupholter 44 4445 REEL RED 44544 2645 264 Rear Park Sense System 45424404 44 eph d 235 Rear ea TOLU s oud POG N EER ees OER 181 Rear Window Defroster sese 269 Rear Window Features leen 269 Rearview Mirrors llle 96 Recorder Event Data xax x42 Seis x HEES XGA 212 Recreational TOWING si qoe tae OR PER den 436 Reformulated Gasoline 411 Iudice 474 Release Hood ug ree sor Eon gest E RO es 188 Reminder Lights Omn usas eR RE RUE ECL ER 192 Reminder Seat Belt llle 54 Remote Control DEE D BIG ER qo Sot ded doy RR dc 25 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 243444 mmm es 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 027 Remote trui ele 22 59 we9 eT SR EE FRE 25 Remote Trunk Release Ln 42 Replacement DUDS sies eiser ER oe e496 RE oe 505 Replacement Keys spe EER SPEK RS HE ti 16 Replacement PariS oae er s eds fetes DI 465 Replacement Tires sa dea sedes cher arte ed 396 Reporting Safety Defects 51244426654 eta roa 536 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 276 293 Restraint Head a 2c aaa 178 Restraints Child eee 73 Restramits Occupa ss one du aa EER tee aby He 44 Rocking V
246. es the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy 358 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode to select a lower gear Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Sec ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position The Mal function Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated If the problem has been momenta
247. essure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will
248. et sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if th
249. floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per Continued sonal injury Continued 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight park
250. forward in a collision 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare 3 Set the parking brake tire in the places provided 4 Place the shift lever into PARK e Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 5 Turn OFF the ignition Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 6 Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas H Jli j LH dm Cer LLI T TERT LIT jd i fi Magi i KT aust In AM 4l i ti Hi led 14 it 41 imd eth I1 N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 443 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Jacking And Changing A Tire WARNING Carefully follow thes
251. g nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous 3 nearly flat extension of the load floor When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into Front Door Trim Storage position If the seatback is not securely locked into 035235231 position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injuty Continued 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued WARNING e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicl
252. g Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Steering Directed Lights When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that
253. g Systemi oste34s4un AER o ea os 270 Loading Velde sr RAAR BREED EE HR SE 421 423 Spore PP n or iS HS MEE 423 ES soo oe oo EN EE oe we OE EE 384 LOCK soas AAN eet KERS teens neta 28 Auto Unlock Ee 0 46 5 RS EG OROS POU DI Automatic Door 4525 13293303 30 Child Protection eee 33 IJOOE s SEAT EE IGK ees Aces sae 28 Power Door 44 4404 64 26444844 exc aw s 29 Low Tire Pressure System aae diocese sp CP E hes 400 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren CAICH ME goeanex ot ES d ES 995329 55 77 78 LEUbDOOUDIL DOO wies soi wes kitir hep ii rii 476 Maintenance Free Battery x suc DAE RA ED ES 47 Maintenance Procedures seen 466 Maintenance Schedule 514 Maintenance General sess 466 Maintenance Sunroof 256 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 278 463 Manual Transmission 2 4054 ate mE EE 490 Fluid Level Check sss 490 Manual Service 246 0 225 PERO aoe Gad x auk 537 Master Cylinder Brakes 0 486 Memory Feature Memory Seat 183 Memory Seal uus us pereit on oa ee ee PR are f 183 Memory Seats and Radio 24 0209 d wes Vues vere 183 Methanol o 4 2 T E DET TTTESTETTTRTTTTTTT 411 Min Iip Computer uas e ose 3 oy eee DERE 295 MOS 2255x565 32 EO RE EE GREG SP 2 5 96 Automatic DIMMING oi nance ve ma ds eas zoe 96 Electric Powered 6465404345 oh step 99 Electric Remote 0000000008 99 Exterior FON
254. g the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you NOTE e In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the Uconnect Touch display e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over head objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the un available screens FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Rada
255. glish and Metric units of measure To make your selection scroll up or NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display any one of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans lemperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation e Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE ru Messages Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons This feature shows the number of stored warning mes sages in the place holder Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Turn Menu OFF Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button Press ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display Pressing any o
256. gn considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 11D481 126 AD Fourth Edition Printed in U S A
257. gnition rate is optimized when the e fully closed windows entries are not similar L e dry weather conditions and N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 e operation from the driver s seat Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your cellular phone is recommended to remain e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by in Bluetooth ON mode 3 lowering the in vehicle audio volume e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Power Up e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the compromised with the convertible top down ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone button Available commands while phone call is in progress The commands can be spoken from amy screen while a call is active after pushing ihe Uconnect voice command button Call John Smith jaj Noes Mobile TER Redial Shows the phonebook Dial Tones entry for John for 12344 Smi
258. h NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN but tons until one of the following Trip functions displays in the EVIC e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON RUN position To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds The current display will reset along with other functions Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between En
259. h will aid the driver s view of the ground rearward of the front doors The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir rors in Reverse position N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 NOTE e The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System e Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030434975 Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right to select the mirror that you want to adjust NOTE A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Mem
260. haded boxes 030536939 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 SEATS Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the forward or rearward or to recline the seatback vehicle NOTE The passenger s seat will move up or down WARNING forward or rearward e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats If Equipped Power Seat Switches On models equipped with power seats the switch is 1 Seat Control located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor 2 Seatback Control 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the s
261. he NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver s seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Two latches must be released to open the hood catch to the left The safety catch is located under the NR AE loca ner DT EG LI of the instrument panel 031305159 Hood Safety Catch Hood Release Lever N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 CAUTION LIGHTS Headlight Switch To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to TY The headlight switch is located on the left side of close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi i the instrument panel This switch controls the mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should operation of the headlights parking lights instru secure both
262. he BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e f the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is re quested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no v
263. he Emergency call may also be initiated by using the touch screen e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your NOTE chances of successfully making a phone call as to that e The towing assistance call may also be initiated by for the mobile phone directly WARNINCG Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone touch The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep Working With Automated Systems
264. he doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect Touch To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights will turn on the
265. he driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of the air bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in ab
266. he shift lever to the right or left D D while in the DRIVE position When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will only shift up and down when right or left is manually selected by the driver or as described below It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen 360 STARTING AND OPERATING M Fully pressing the accelerator pedal while in AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission as needed for maximum acceleration 3 6L Models Only The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear Tapping the shift lever to the D position at a stop will allow starting in second gear After a stop the driver should manually upshift D the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right D for a few seconds You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with an active on demand All Wheel Drive AWD system which makes available optimum
267. he wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shiel
268. hicle for filter replacement instructions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS z and turn on AVC Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT oet the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle a set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows D Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level Sm with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on AVC If it s cloudy or Y dark set the Mode control to Bi Level zz with A C on Adjust Temperature O i control for comfort COOL OR COLD Sot the Mode control to Mix or Defrost Sg HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and bo TV Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear 644 s COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor A_ If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 74 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Mix or Defrost pille as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 045636890 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS
269. hicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires NS TA TING AND OPERATING 405 Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the LOW TIRE message will turn off and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System
270. hicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny
271. high power draw accessories or power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage Continued 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console 035135226 Front Cupholders Heated and Cooled Cupholders If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled cupholders The cupholders are designed to help keep warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool Retractable Cover UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 WARNING When using the cupholder in the Heat position avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup holder in order to reduce the possibilit
272. hrottle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Automatic Door Locks Programming If Equipped The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with Uconnect Touch refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the Uconnect Touch perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e f you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in
273. hrough an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page before speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended Phonebook Mobile and Favorites name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth in order to use this feature If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is not compatible
274. ic Stability Program ESP Indicator 377 LE deer ac a vues SR Ss oe 13 99 4 19 PUR SE 88 FOC 1922 5 Hazard Warning Flasher 224a emm peu 438 Headhie nt SWIC scio ign deo oen Res 189 Hlesdl ki esse Mes OES VERE 159 507 Headlights On Reminder users ak 4 4 192 Headlights On With Wipers 190 200 Lol Dean 4 326544 oy th oe ea PORE SU EA 194 High Beann Indicator soos sase ot pee ie es 279 High Beam Low Beam Select 194 M minated ENY a ica ia derde en oce oi 20 Instrument Cluster 000 189 Intensity Control esses 644 EER SPR 197 linis MP PCs 196 Brno m 509 552 INDEX M Hens On Be ide Yi ER VEREER RE 192 Low Fuel 2222 oe ee RE RUPES EER GRA DA 289 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 278 Map Keddi 2490454 quede ea x gw bs 195 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 198 Passe ve te EO tee vaca tae ey ERO PR es 194 Keddie TERT STE HOEDER 195 246 Seat Belt Reminder 283 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 281 id AO FASE EN 505 506 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 278 at DES Sous a se got ee Soe E ep m 190 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 281 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 277 400 Traction Control 4244216485405 464 Ghee a D TURIS DU sib PECES OR GEE RR EE N 88 193 VAY NTON 26 2 4 deh is POG E PPAR 100 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 275 N INDEX 553 Load Levelin
275. ield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after t
276. ification Label esu LR RE ER 422 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading sie Ve RS HE KA HER ES 385 421 423 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Voce lOD E 64542 WAARDE RI REDES 339 505 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Viscosity EUG ON 24 00 ades ad due ge Gt 468 469 Warung Flasher LIazdPd o 54 650 eeeen DER Pi 438 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 24593 Warnings and Cautions eie ss deco rede ss 6 Warranty DIEOPEDOUOBE uuu oo oa oe 03 999 DE DEE 536 Washer PCM MWC AREND IE EE ENE A77 Washers Windshield 198 199 477 Washing VENCle 24 5 seek AR eno pee S e denm PR 491 Water Drivin Through 21292239 09 xe dr Wheel and Wheel Trim Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 562 INDEX NEE id Win Dal lelie wes ries eESTSSPEETAISS PS 42 256 Widow FOCCING asie 3 122833 2 3 os ogee bed 340 VUINGOWS AA EE N SE AT EE VEE UTOR TET 39 Power aod 4c4 AU RE ER E RE SEED RES Ni 39 Windshield Defroster SS SS 87 Windshield Washers 198 199 PO 5x2 nb oe cone ee 2 0 N 9 477 Windshield Wiper Blades 476 Windshield VAISOES ssa ete t ee 909 0099 Gees ee ed 198 Wiper Blade Replacement is aie ses He ua es 476 Wider Delay I 199 Wipers Intermuttent sis a od votos N shes a E ache a 199 Wipers Rain Sensitive angue doo cured anke UR Rs 200 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special desi
277. ill Start Assist HSA 375 El Ready Alert Braking a soe e ad rrise 376 E Rain Brake Support s vii em ER ORR 3 377 H ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light 44 2 ems x 377 Lovnehtonizing ESC sass ri ive ase Sp Rd os 378 W Tire Safety Information 379 Eine MEE ack fem are d Que DRR Eater ded 379 O Tire Identification Number TIN 382 H Tire Terminology And Definitions 383 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 384 N Tires General Information 388 EV lite ReSSUle ui soa EE ee ees N esas 388 oO Tire Inflation Pressures 4 xe a Eks an yes 389 o Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 391 aRadial Ties dass 6446043 KERR DER 391 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel It Equipped suu soria 3 392 B Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 992 o Full Size Spare If Equipped 999 O Limited Use Spare If Equipped 393 EPI Spine 1s eek e ae keke bee SR RES 394 o Tread Wear Indicators iss ad ms 395 Elle IE woe 4 ert hee sunbed cage ees 995 Heb deed Hess 193 ass oa ete e p d 396 W Tire Chains SS Se se 397 W Snow Tires 2 SS SS ee 398 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 399 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 400 O Base System O Premium System If Equipped 405 E General Information sis N sr wes 410 Mi Fuel Require
278. ine from starting 452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further information CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENC
279. ing Answer or Ignore Press the Answer soft key or the button on the steering wheel to accept the call N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Uconnect Phone will then interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will display a pop up showing Answer Ignore or Transfer Press the So button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the EVR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Toggling
280. ing for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 3 Bree SARTRE RE EE N EE 96 O Power Mirrors lesser 99 O Inside Day Night Mirror 96 D Heated Mirrors If Equipped 100 D Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 96 O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 100 EO atside MIOS sans aa Gb hehe eed esa os 97 B Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of D Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 98 PUN LE 4 Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming ll Blind Spot Monitoring If Equipped 101 Mirror If Equipped ui su ie ie hok m 98 Eon Cross Fali 244 04 54ae ooee ne EED a a 106 O Outside Mirrors Approach Light B Modes Of Operation 0 108 IL EQUIPPEO sies ere vx go Rhe Y e 98 o Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped 98 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mi Uconnect Phone 000000 109 O Uconnect Touch 4 3 44 esu etos pw m es 109 Fi SOLD bocce ave ona esas eeu Pr dent 112 O Phone Call Features 118 O Uconnect Phone Features 122 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 127 O Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone ii sos one soe nya 127 O General Information
281. ing is complete press the Back Arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been se
282. instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 6 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 7 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 9 AUTO Operation Button If Equipped Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 10 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 11 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature setting
283. io If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the Automatic Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect Touch system display When the Uconnect Touch system is in different modes Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and pas senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display General Overview Hard Keys Hard keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect Touch 4 3 screen in the center of the instru ment panel There are also hard keys located below the Uconnect Touch screen g 044336084 Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Hard key UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 3 2 15 Blues 10 10 nm ONS N NW Front Rear Sync A C imate OFF Driver 045635318 14 13 1 2 045641067 Automatic Climate Controls Hard keys Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Manual ATC System Shown Temperature Controls Soft keys Soft Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL U
284. ion 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gaso
285. ion and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your prd per D P 533 O Prepare For The Appointment 595 aie eie Mi a aciei dre edo 9d ELEK 933 O Be Reasonable With Requests 599 N If You Need Assistance 899 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 534 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 534 Hn Medco Contactes ss x Ee AD RAS BL 534 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 535 EESOPUIOO CONUGC 42644654 ve e anes aoe 535 W Warranty Information 536 WE MOPAR Parts 3 ires brain DRR BO Rd 536 W Reporting Safety Defects 536 O In The 50 United States And Washington prop C O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 532 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Traction Grades ws x pe emi e tuns TT pti 539 Quality Grade P DR RR Eb EI DES 099 D Treadwear i met oS eae Oe DES SES HESS EO 539 H Temperaire Grades a ge ans oa oh eo ee oS 540 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 533 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty fo
286. ior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and
287. is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver NS TA TING AND OPERATING 425 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
288. isual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Uconnect Phone Uconnect Touch 4 3 Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Redialing last dialed numbers Redial e Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back e View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Screen Activated Features e Dialing via Keypad using touch screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen e Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen e Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly Your mobile pho
289. it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and tire 7 Mount the spare tire Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire 446 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sa CAUTION Ar For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the et e Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use spare tire is mounted incorrectly Spare under Tires General Information in Start ing and Operating for additional warnings cautions and information about the spare tire its use and operation 8 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground Lol 060633619 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack Mounting Spare Tire handle counterclockwise N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 447 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft lb 150 N m If in doubt about
290. itter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Enter The Trunk With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter wi
291. ive failures of a spoken command the VR session with end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command EVR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel or Help These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command EVR button and say Help You will hear available commands for the screen displayed NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Natural Speech Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly omith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies th
292. ive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 413 MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system
293. kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 386 STARTING AND OPERATING M 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of
294. ki zs reed eu thee folowing commands While he message test rs desptayed the following commands are ayassble aller are available automatically gushing Use phones VR bulion Missa wilh entry Pama i ru cae pag dos Arrie weh any ed ri jet slae oi yaaa and boot Tau can TE ja als sap ad the syrom wall nek pou wibsch phone rusmibier quu Enter THIS SERRE kom Number want te Sereruf ay Rp trs enr Jan Sart adenmnad iil prevede i ny associated wiih T You cnn nghe Moida alh Herma ok dd fae i sys pr say Li fo 3 hu enn pk ner crib uim GING cis Rand Cam ar mis ed pnmo Wahiche audio hear al 14 defined message Is 4 Mas Raging comenandis nen woek A ng Liopnnnct sy suem is Eat ER Tis AANGE Anci TA syslem iig mz ps pro nae Longe TL Sr Esse Tesi n 5 nu can ear AB SAS 171 wan ony pene rumber SAPO Ey you hane phone i G TEM rar epiac A gilh ary Prisa nimpar aram Fa Tue senes Enlerr in contact T IF pour mios cine nor magun phones eye ina ex ra tog daweised pnr ST ihan thee name and Snares wi rum eke rates Troad Min ponies rupi maan in lur ENGER phone type Note Available Voice Commands are shown In bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030539972 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or
295. l not illuminate Rear Monitoring Overtaking Approaching Overtaking Passing UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage berms etc However occasionally the system may alert on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Stationary Objects 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming aids ae be blocked Proceed Opposing Traffic slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP Detection Zones RCP
296. l tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs 392 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and Wheel If Equipped The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original equipment tire and wheel refer to the recommended tire rotation pattern in Tire Rotation Recommendations in Starting and Operating for further information If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary em
297. lash To Pass eee 194 Flashers Hazard Ware ss ep SE kp ene RR 438 Teen ie ed 224393 939 ARME IE ER 88 193 275 Hat Tite Chane ing rep a ke 44 09 4 HERE ats 439 Flexible Fuel Vehicles GE ruisiie Kanpe 5 65 24 seen bee eed n oed 417 ae OU oo 29c14E9 P ESPTAT Sup 417 Fuel Requirements sie ae 0 04 4 HD 415 416 Maintenance 44 3 edn x X Nob Ke Re GE 418 Replacement Parts aussi Rr sur RS 418 DIAGN c EE ht HAS eae so 417 Flooded Engine Starting 22 es 94 ek seg SPR 351 Floor Console eee eee eee 265 Fid UC apace PPP 510 Ehud Leaks EE RE AA ones Reo eed ORS ee 88 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 489 Drak 2222122024932 44592045 255 ee 486 Cooling SYStER 2 dodo edocet a enn ee ed 481 PACS 2e BAR bar 2 Quis Xs A sta 467 dk ide os erum dos Gk ee ENE 490 IL Brake 2 222442 25 53 09209 3 X8 wi 912 PIGS 2404264058 OAAR ON EE ER S eS rhy 511 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 511 FOP ios Er 197 275 Folding Rear COD ss ord gua oa Bea oe ge REK 181 Forward Collision Warning 232 289 Freeme A Stuck Vehicle uu quce a Coma aie on 452 PUG L2 RO OE OR OE EES RE 410 Additives een 413 GIC UR RAAR SET OR EE OO TOE 411 CONSENS 123 ERK LESS ER ERG p s 294 Sean o ER ENOET TE TETOTTTTSRTRTRRT TM 411 Filler Door Gas Cap sure ER SAK Al BR DR 280 N INDEX 549 ei OE AE Ss bee eaten es 410 COGS geshegaebhagene eee a4 OR EDS 280 I5 rr Bored eee EDE m
298. lbs B Bulb Replacement 506 O Front Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp And Side Marker Lamp Models With Halogen Headlamps Im 506 D Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park Turn Lamp Models With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID 507 El BackUp amps 2205565 094 GEDEK e555 508 E DICONSe Lamp si d uere sd oe ye cs A ARRA oe 509 NM Fluid Capacities cosses xara SN 510 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 511 GPN DG 4 EERS EE FEE EK SN st r ii 44 4 TL 517 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L N e I i mra NT Me Ww w 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir QO 5 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Engine Oil Fill 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 074438716 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L OO O O YA 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 5 Engine Oil Fill 2 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 6 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This s
299. lder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 534 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C
300. leaving the vehicle set the ignition switch to the OFF position Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave ignition switch in the ACC or ON RUN positions A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Lock Switch 021835322 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open and the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The t
301. lected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings Io change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the
302. lected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On Ist Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors On 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all the doors or use the RKE transmitter e Memory Linked to FOB Touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft key to change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat po sitioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle driver 1 and driver 2 last mode settings and presets To make your selection touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft key
303. lent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 6L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent opark Plugs 3 6L Engine RER8ZWYCB4 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE m Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS 11655 such as Fuchs
304. light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the KA Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will u
305. line will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NEE To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear an
306. lock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sync Time Touch the Sync Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may have the radio set the time automatically To change the Sync Time setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Safety Assistance e Front Collision Warning If Equipped Touch the Front Collision Warning soft key to change this display The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status press and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist Touch the Park Assist soft key to change this display The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when
307. look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Outside mirrors are hinged allowing the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Outside Mirrors Approach Light If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with approach lighting contain one LED which is located in the upper outboard mirror glass corner The approach light supplies illuminated entry lighting which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open any door This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning whic
308. lovebox storage compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel R Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment Console Features There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift lever Glovebox Storage Compartment 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Two separate storage compartments are also located Inside the center console armrest there is a removable underneath the center console armrest upper storage tray that can be slid forward rearward on rails for access to the lower storage area This tray has an integrated coin holder along with additional area for small items like an ipod or phone Below the upper tray the lower storage compartment is made for larger items like CDs and tissue boxes In addition the 12 volt power outlet USB and Aux jack are located here WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music 035335227 players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury Center Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 Door Storage Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with 60 40 The door panels contain storage areas Split Folding Rear Seat The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pullin
309. lt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident QUIET e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt
310. ly in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone amp e Button is used to mi get into the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command EVR Button VR is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The EVR button
311. ly answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call touch the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Only one call can be placed on hold at a time You can also press the amp button to toggle between the active and held phone call Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the button or the end soft key Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call
312. m Uconnect Phone al Recent Calls lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features e Dialing via Keypad using touch screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen e Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs e Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS e Sending a text message via the touch screen e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen e Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly NOTE Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used on
313. maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re
314. me to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 5 7L Engine SAE 5W
315. ments 0 410 O 3 6L Engine If Equipped es su ia RE 410 H5 7E Eneme ICEQUIDPOd vaueses e yos 410 oO Reformulated Gasoline 411 346 STARTING AND OPERATING M O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 411 H E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 412 Hi MMT In Gasoline sca uo that otek CR dents 413 O Materials Added To Fuel 413 O Fuel System Cautions 45669 2800 HORE 413 oO Carbon Monoxide Warnings 414 ll Flexible Fuel 3 6L Engine Only I QUO CG cusa wur d a e rotes MEER HORE Di 415 B E 85 General Information 415 O Ethanol Fuel E 85 5 252434 kh 416 EL Fuel Requirenients a2 ESSE XR 416 O Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 417 PSII rr pe 417 Et isi SE RINE os RO E BROER ERA ees A17 Ei Replacement Paris uode AE ER ED ES 418 OMMEN oie scq yos shee kari ees ceeds 418 W Adding Fuel 4 2c cctv ges enses pases 418 O Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 421 W Vehicle Loading 421 O Vehicle Certification Label 422 O Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 422 O Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 422 EG verlad ing e ooo ENE RR AE V Rope HEER d 423 AEON P a ea oe 423 MI ler TOWNE 2 occce dees feeeser E Pues 424 O Common Towing Definitions 424 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 El Trailer Mitch Classification sus
316. minate To turn the system off push the ON OFF CANCEL ET button a second time The Cruise Indicator light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on 1 ON OFF 2 RES when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally 4 CANCEL 3 5ET set the system or cause it to go faster than you want NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec You could lose control and have an accident Always tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut leave the system OFF when you are not using it down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button e The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire if equipped To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF e
317. monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 NOTE Ina parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode t
318. multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Call Controls The touch screen allows you to control the following call features e Answer e End e Ignore e Hold unhold Mute unmute e Transfer the call to from the phone e Swap 2 active calls e Join 2 active calls together Touch Tone Number Entry e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Dial soft key 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the EVR button while in a call and say 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail pass word is stored in your mobile phonebook Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types e Incoming Calls e Outgoing Calls Missed Calls All Calls These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the amp button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will display a pop up show
319. n What To Do In Emergencies for further information 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ee ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that a complete stop is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the Module vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one is at idle speed hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above WARNING idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot Remember to disconnect the engine block heater is firmly on the brake pedal cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 353 WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal
320. n its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear IF EQUIPPED camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear appears again Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate istance to the rear of the vehicle Red ft 30cm When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to 3 o a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Yellow i ft 3 ft BO cm 1m 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when e To avoid
321. n touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further infor mation e Headlight Off Delay Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Engine Off Power Delay Touch the Engine Off Power Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 Compass Settings e Variance Touch the Variance soft key to change this display Com pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differ ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the dif ferences and provide
322. nce Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery Location MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 81342982 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Batt
323. nce from the window 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately The automatic load leveling system will provide a level 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading vehicle must be driven to reset the system conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS B Instrument Panel Features 273 Mi Instrument Cluster 274 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 279 Bl Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 285 D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Di PIE pacar gage een NUR RARE ARE eae A 287 HEVIC White Telltale Lights s sses rss 4400s 288 O EVIC Amber Telltale Lights 289 PLEVIC Ked Telltale Lights sie Ep HER voa 290 o Oil Change Due O Fuel Economy A yenice eed sie Me e urs PS RE EE es 295 SO TUG AE OT AE EE OE EE 295 EOS CC 296 O Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 297 Pl Wiessa CCS PETPRET m 297 El Tura Went OU 6 4224 254 8 set oe ES OE 298 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Bl Uconnect Touch
324. nd Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric then touch the arrow back soft key As you continue the information will display in the selected units of measure e Voice Response Touch the Voice Response soft key to change the Voice Response Length settings To change the Voice Response Length press and release the Brief or Long soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Touch Screen Beep Touch the Touch Screen Beep soft key to turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed To change the Touch Screen Beep setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key then touch the arrow back soft key NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 e Fuel Saver Display Touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key to turn the ECO message located in the instrument cluster display on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Clock e Set Time Touch the Set Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may select the time display settings To make your selection touch the Set Time soft key adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down soft keys select AM or PM select 12 hr or 24 hr Then touch the arrow back soft key when all selections are complete e Show Time Status Touch the Show Time Status soft key to change this display When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital c
325. nd say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry and or Last Name as Voice Password then if you press the EvR button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phone book entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The amp vr button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command imme diately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the
326. nd water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equivalent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or
327. ne main screen e Touch the Favorites soft key Next scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favorites e Touch the Options soft key e Touch the next to appropriate Favorite that is to be altered N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 68 af FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out VW 72 Phonebook gt pie e Voicemail Edit Number Reset to Default Pepe Roni a Buddy s Pizza e The Options pop up will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number to default Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service pro vider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Name Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back e Favorite Phonebook e Mobile Phonebook e Recent Call Log e SMS Message Viewer 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE All of the above operations except Redial canbe Call Controls done with 1 call or less active The tou
328. ne of the four steering wheel buttons brings the menu back Uconnect TOUCH SETTINGS The Uconnect Touch system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features Hard Keys Hard Keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect Touch 4 3 screen In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch screen Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings In this mode the Uconnect Touch system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Heated Seats Engine Off Operation Compass settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup through hard keys and soft keys NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 Press the Settings hard key to access the Settings screen use the Page Up Down soft keys to scroll through the Setti ngs Wc Display following settings Touch the desired setting soft key to change the setting u
329. ne s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows u
330. nger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it ln addition there are tether strap anchorages sy behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then rotate the tether anchor age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you pu
331. ning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 518 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 32 000 miles 52 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the engine air cleaner filter irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the air conditioning filter 24 000 miles 39 000 km Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the CV joints Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or l
332. nresa 340 474 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 473 474 Air Conditioning System 338 473 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 341 Air Pressure Tires 000000000 389 Dur 2a Vea oe ek ee OER Ee ee 57 68 Airbag DEDIOVMIENE sia0hst2 ERES oho EAE 69 AirDap ed a ee ee TESTA ES 66 67 72 86 281 Airbag Maintenance ss ese ER RR RR ER ieee es 71 AIDAS Gde m 60 65 68 Airbag Window Side Curtain 61 65 68 Alarm decuit Alarm s ese teeter REED u 17 Alarm LENE suce sues ia EET S RIP oA 281 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alarm Panic oen oe oar BO 99x KR ru EUR 23 All Wheel Drive AWD 360 490 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 369 371 Anti Lock Warning Light e eR RS 276 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 481 510 Bes D ER EEN EE ee 484 Appearance COIS ua s rS ERE PER S PP 491 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 17 Assist Hill Start 2 5 rg n don RR 3 5 Auto Down Power Windows 40 Auto Unlock Doors 41 59 292249 RT ERR OE S 31 Auto Up Power WiNdOWS xem 540446444 Bes 40 N INDEX 543 Automatic Dimming Mirror i s seges da eas 96 Automatic Door Locks 00 30 31 Automate Headlights emus 2429 SPI XS HR 190 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 293 Automatic Temperature Control ATC
333. nsion tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 528 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 152 000 miles 247 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 529 t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNINCG e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunct
334. ntains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead WARNING e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a conv
335. ny doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAUTION Continued The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids vehicle that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these maintenance schedule there are other components which components as the chemicals can damage your may require servicing or replacement in the future engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 3 6L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the c
336. o Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the amp button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the e button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the Seu or EVR buttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the or EvR buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further information Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owners Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK 1 Press the Phone soft key on the screen to begin 2 If there is no phone currently connected with the system a pop up will appear N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
337. o avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that WARNING has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point e Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard information Using the wrong type of brake fluid or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be Continued taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid c
338. ode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key until
339. ol ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions e When you apply the brakes e When the parking brake is set e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL e When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 To Activate To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in button again At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Ready the EVIC will display Adaptive Cruise Control Off WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden Adaptive Cruise Control tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it Ready 56789 mi 5 A Adaptive Cruise Control Ready 032433097 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie To Set A Desired ACC Speed Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the not the
340. omatically update and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE 404 STARTING AND OPERATING M message will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON 3 Driving the ve
341. ompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take pre cedence over other paired phones within range N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Bluetooth pairing successful Droid Incredible Make this phone the favorite 030536350 NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest phone paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones or e Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device e Touch the Player soft key to begin e Change the Source to Bluetooth e Touch the Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key NOTE If there is no device currently connected with the system a pop up will appear e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting
342. on 5 Maximum Pressure T hich 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and e lemporary spare tires are high pressure compact Temperature Grades spares designed for temporary emergency use only 380 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Tires designed to this standard have the letter T e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
343. on Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire STARTING AND OPERATING 395 These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e lire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death 3
344. on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate NOTE e Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRs e Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper tire pressure 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ee TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW
345. onds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 WARNING Continued Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be ableto Always make sure that floor mats are properly feel the air directed against the windshield See your attached to the floor mat fasteners authorized dealer for service if your defroster is Never place or install floor mats or other floor inoperable coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNINCG vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure
346. one Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take prece dence over other paired phones within range Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device Touch the Player hard key to begin Press the Source soft key Change the Source to Bluetooth Touch the Add Device soft key Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled Audio Device When prompted on the device select the Uconnect device and enter the PIN e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE If No is selected device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and or Audio Device 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M within range If you would need to choose a particular Phone or Audio Device follow these steps Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone
347. ont Low Beam Headlamp and Park Turn Lamp Models with High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID HID Headlamps The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME Backup Lamps 3 Remove cover 1 Open trunk 4 Twist the bulb one quarter turn to remove 2 Remove fastener from cover Reinstall new bulb C l bg 6 Install cover and fastener 073339739 EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 License Lamp T 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUID CAPACITIES 5 6 Liters 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 6 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 10 Quarts 5 Liters Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR 14 5 Quarts 13 9 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR 15 Quarts 14 3 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equiva
348. ontamination from foreign matter or moisture Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 Fluid Level Check CAUTION Continued Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted e The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating If you noti
349. or the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and or condition warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire
350. ornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 20 OID Overdrive OFF Indicator Light o D This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected and over
351. orrect level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is ti
352. ory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light 030434976 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Sun Visor To use the Slide On Rod feature of the sun visor rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 desired position To use the extender feature of the sun visor grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward 030440176 Slide On Rod Feature BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of
353. ory seat switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The switch consists of three buttons The S button which is used to activate the memory save function and the 1 and 2 buttons which are used to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles Memory Seat Switches Programming The Memory Feature NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory To create a new memory profile perform the following 1 Place the ignition into the RUN position 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET 5 button on the memory switch 4 Within five seconds press and release the MEMORY button 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped will display which memory position has been set NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile e The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programme
354. ou will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound com mand form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver sational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence
355. ouch the Memory Linked To FOB soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be available e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto On Driver Heated Ventilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has b
356. ouch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status touch and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for sys tem function and operating information NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this m
357. our passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
358. out 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can ai
359. owing messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted Trunk Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run fo
360. p to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone amp e Button is used to mi get into the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command EVR Button VR is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task Y
361. placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 10 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you Certain conditions such as poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause 11 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation damage to the engine control system It also could
362. play shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert opera tion when the system is detecting an obstacle NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 WARNING ALERTS Rear vi Greater Don 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Display Message Park Assist On Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Detected Detected Detected Detected Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow Continuous Flashing Flashing Flashing Enabling And Disabling ParkSense When the ParkSense soft key is pressed to disable the ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the system the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF Uconnect Touch System The available choices are Off message for approximately five seconds Refer to Elec Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Uconnect tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The ParkSense system uses four sensors locate
363. possibly result in an electrical system ES RO poe memes failure ME 5 30 Amp Sunroof When replacing a blown fuse it is important to Pink use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating 40 A E t Lighting 1 The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated Kat o Ee may result in a dangerous electrical system over z mE Exterior Tichtino d0 load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it 7 aar oc penne indicates a problem in the circuit that must be 30 Amp Interior Lighting 30 Amp Power Locks Pink 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Dee Eed ei 12 20 Amp Cigar Lighters Instru Yellow ment Panel amp Power Outlet Console Rear 26 29 24 25 26 27 ol 32 3 10 Amp Fuel Door Diagnostic Red Port 15 Amp Radio Screen Blue 10 Amp Tire Pressure Monitor Red _ Fuse Spare HVAC Blower 25 Amp Amplifier Natural Fuse Spare 25 Amp _ Power Seats Natural 15 Amp HVAC Module Blue_ Cluster 3 15 Amp Ignition Switch Blue Wireless Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse 10 Amp Steering Column Red Module Clock 10 Amp Battery Sensor Red LX Fuse Spare 15 Amp Radio 10 Amp Park Assist Blind Red jSpot Camera 15 Amp Cluster Rearview Blue Mirror Compass 10 Amp Ad
364. pushed into you causing serious injury Continued N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VE
365. r approximately four to eight seconds when the ignition is first cycled to ON RUN e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the approximate four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the ve
366. r Jacking 2 anes 442 0 Jacking And Changing A Tire 443 E Road Tire Installation uim erar d 447 ll jump Starting Procedures O Preparations For Jump Start o Jump Starting Procedure N Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ll Shift Lever Override o With Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped 454 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle 455 O Without The Ignition Key 457 438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopp
367. r Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 96789 mi ACC FCW Unavailable Warning 032433104 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumpe
368. r Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 022636634 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which a
369. r Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK 1 You can do either of the following a Press the Settings hard key Page down to the Phone Bluetooth soft key press it and you will see the Paired Phones screen If there are no paired phones you will see lt Empty gt as the first device name b Press the MORE hard key then press the Phone soft key and you will go to the Uconnect Phone main screen Press the Settings soft key If there are no phones currently paired a pop up will appear If you select Yes you will go the Paired Phones screen if you select No you will return to the Uconnect Phone main menu 2 At the Paired Phones screen press the Add Device soft key and a pop up with instructions will appear N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 9 Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone select the Uconnect device and enter the PIN 4 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite ph
370. r in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status aa be vi i a art H amp S nT EO EE HR EO PISIS 5 032737803 Rear Park Assist Display N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 032737807 032737804 Rear Park Assist OFF Slow Tone The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fast Tone 032737805 032737806 Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning dis
371. r information is responsible for braking the vehicle down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Ready Alert Braking Continued Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 377 It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turn
372. r representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 383 Tire Terminology And Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 384 STARTING AND OPERATING Tir
373. r the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward 045635319 Door Lock Knob If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim e For personal security and safety in the event of an panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When
374. rases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system mai
375. re a sensor realignment N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 e f the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service e Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE Installing a vehicle front end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E Service ACC Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACC FCW Unavaila
376. re system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the speci fied engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water
377. re used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger ALR ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restr
378. rly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump starting NOTE The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 449 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain
379. rmation on TRUNK button on the Remote trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature Keyless Entry RKE transmitter LS twice within five seconds TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the Blacafd7 Trunk Release Button With the ignition in the ON RUN position the Trunk trunk lid when ens vehicle is unattended Once in Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster the trunk young children may not be able to escape indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped heat stroke With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed display until the trunk is closed As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee In the event of an individual being locked inside the OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the Some of the most important safety features in your glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching vehicle are the restraint systems mechanism n RJ Pod e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag e Supplemental Side
380. rns Press the Driver or Pass seat soft key lo even at low temperatures especially if used for 4y cated on the Uconnect Touch display once to long periods of time select HI level heating Press the soft key a Continued second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF Front Heated Seat Operations Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 8 4 and 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the Uconnect Touch display aj key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level heating Press the soft NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl level If the HlI level setting is selected the UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can
381. rols on the rear passenger doors and the rear sunscreen if equipped To disable the window controls and the rear sunscreen press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee controls and the rear sunscreen press and release the Wind Buffeting window lockout button again setting it in the UP Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of position 021935321 Window Lockout Switch pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 The trunk lid can be released from Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know outside the vehicle by pressing the Before Starting Your Vehicle for more info
382. rrow back soft key Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 e Daytime Running Lights Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Steering Directed Lights Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Flash Headlights With Lock Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Doors amp Locks e Auto Unlock On Exit Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key to change this display When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle i
383. rt the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 349 Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START ra STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE STA
384. ry the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears To reset the trans mission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 6 Move the shift lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the transmission cannot be reset see your authorized dealer NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situa tions Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply move t
385. ry or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 WARNING Continued NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having CAUTION adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions e Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged TIRE CHAINS parts of the chain before further use Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet Install chains on the rear wheels Doi tightly as SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain mile 0 8 km manufacturer In
386. s NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 12 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode gt Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of P air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets u 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window vel demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions e Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mo
387. s built into the headlight switch Fog Light Switch O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 031439995 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more th
388. s diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain t
389. s free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in the EVIC CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking c
390. s off ee OFF 13 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 14 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the lt Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle 15 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 16 Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 17 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE e You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK e The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 18 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi o mately 15 seconds wh
391. s spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as 394 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck WARNING your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Informati
392. s stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Flash Lights With Lock Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sound Horn With Remote Start Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sound Horn With Lock Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will chirp when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Remote Door Unlock Order Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft key to change this display When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is se
393. s vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition light is in the OFF position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the RUN position by pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once or twice engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever 356 STARTING AND OPERATING M Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substi
394. sabled Vehicle Towing 546 INDEX NEE Id Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant Engine Oil Door Locks Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy E 85 Fuel Electric Rear Window Defrost Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Traction Control System ux 4444445444249 94 Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses 496 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 207211 Electronic Stability Control ESC 372 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC sic ade owe d eb eae reri 243 285 Emergency Deck Lid Release suce dee t4 Rs 43 Emergency Trunk Release 5 2249 he 64505 43 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When SUCK o sce t ta 452 Hazard Warning Flasher iss eeuse teme 438 Ire AS ES EKEN 439 Tipp Sar ses tana oem ete eh PR Rd 448 Overenn is ties BERE RR EE EE 438 li aoa AAR ERA SERS RR AAI A EDE 455 Emission Control System Maintenance 463 BUB 45 eusulded4 545 9655 PE Od SPEI 462 EP leef 22252523229 S Edd E REP ERE 470 block Healer PPP E 352 a EEEEEELLIUGGIILIHUULIIILIISILLIIILLLIILIILLLI LILOILLLUR C IIdLPA UAIUAIUOGGLGALI LAAL GUUALUL 1LuULIL LLEIL LLULUUUL ULUAU 1 INDEX 547 Break In Recommendations 84 Checking Ol Level ni 24e ee4a4 see oes 4
395. say Iowing Assistance This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the EvR button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 t you can press the amp vR button and say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry with First and or Last Name as Voicemail Password then if you press the VR button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone numb
396. se and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 NOTE e f the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window cont
397. se MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 3076 compared to gasoline operation 418 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located in the driver s door map pocket CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your 056837179 Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 2 Open the fuel filler door vehicl
398. se air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components
399. se is highlighted in the EVIC Status ofthe ACC When ACC is set the set speed will display or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information Adaptive Cruise Control Off NE 83 F When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready WMLIZ The Light When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting The Afters has not been selected the display will read Adaptive He Lives Cruise Control Ready 032433431 Example Only N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC Display Warnings And Maintenance activity occurs which may include any of the following Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning e Set Speed Change The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of e System Cancel poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the e System Off EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate e Distance Setting Change e Driver Overri
400. se out of the settings screen e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Show Time In Status Bar When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft key 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Front Collision Sensitivity If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status touch and release the OFF Near or Far button Then t
401. sely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed 400 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotation method is the forwar
402. sh the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie For center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and adjustable headrest with the headrest in the full down position then attach the hook to the tether anchor located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window 022637851 Adjustable Headrest Downward Position Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infan
403. sies ve d 427 El omie TPS sa 2524912929 LORD RE KO 434 O Trailer Towing Weights lll Recreational Towing Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 428 Behind Motorhome Etc lle 436 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 428 H Two Wheel Drive And All Wheel Drive 436 O Towing Requirements ab ii ds aem ace dede d 429 348 STARTING AND OPERATING M STARTING PROCEDURES CAUTION Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat ing precautions are not observed belts e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to SR iu or a RNING Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the ignition in the ACC or RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can sta
404. sing the description shown on the following pages for each setting Please Clock select a setting Safety Assistance Exit Lights dc Uconnect Touch 4 3 Soft Keys Display e Brightness 0443360833 Touch the Brightness soft key to change this display When in this display you may select display brightness with the headlights on and the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by 1 Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings Hard Key 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Mode Touch the Mode soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status press and release the Day Night or Auto soft key then by touch the arrow back soft key e language Touch the Language soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the English French Fran ais or Spanish Espa ol soft key to select the language preferred Then touch the arrow back soft key As you continue the information will display in the selected language e Units Touch the Units soft key to change this display When in this display you may switch the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped between US a
405. sitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle e If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds KEYLESS ENTER N GO the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the theft alarm vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked 021837301 Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors Ist Press refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transm
406. sole 0 0 0 245 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 253 O Front Map Reading Lights 246 O Opening Sunroof Express 254 O Sunglass Bin Door 4259 9 Rm 246 D Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 254 lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 247 B Closing Sunroof Express 255 O Programming HomeLink 248 B Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 255 O Gate Operator Canadian Programming 251 E Dineh Protect Feature ousus 45 04 thea 255 E Using HomeLink ss sva00 cane wax ms 251 O Venting Sunroof Express 255 O Reprogramming A Single O Sunshade Operation eade se ED KB TEES 255 ae ech ama nace 292 Wind Buffeting eene 256 i A E eue O Sunroof Maintenance sas 4005 08 rms 256 E Iroubleshoohne Tips ss da ESEL DR Ges 252 Ignition Off Operation E 256 O General Information s osa o e SR EES 253 uec ie AAR N 257 B Electrical Power Outlets 257 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 EN piele sm oL ETRSEERSPRRPOREE NAE 262 ELDOOFSIDIMBO sask ESE reri NE AA 267 Hi Froiit Seat Cupholder ss 95495 RU OR PER RS 262 O Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped With 60 40 O Rear Seat Cupholders sess 264 Split Folding Rear Seat sies EE ha HE 267 kor RE gud REG RS QE RE ERE ES de 265 W Rear Window Features sse O Glovebox Storage i 2e doors a dedos a ai O Console Features SS 265
407. ss Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent but
408. ss or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 520 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 521 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule O C C C O L L L L L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the
409. stall tire chains only on P215 65R17 Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h P225 60R18 and P235 55R18 size tires Refer to tirechain Continued s com for more information 398 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued e Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on rear wheels only Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adver
410. stalling a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 To attach a child restraint tether strap 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the for the strap between the anchor and the child seat seat where you are placing the child restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the S child Use only the
411. steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches Som 045035190 Remote Sound System Controls The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it pla
412. sually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi ee tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Transmission Temperature Warning Light with severe usage such as trailer towing If this run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off This light indicates that the transmission fluid light turns on safely pull over and stop the CAUTION temperature is running hot This may occur vehicle Then shift the
413. such as make a phone call and to Kelly omith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command VR button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M You can also press the Seu or EVR buttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the Se or EVR buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further informa tion Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using you
414. sult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 A OO XE De AW a gA BA nl ELECT Aga ry EXTERIOR DULA HIGH BEAM TURM SIGNALS HEATED SEAT TIOR LOCK A MM HROGEAM DARANE Line ASEET SYBTEM D 3 a4 020 tj Te X i EYETFM FUEL HERR i Dey MANTEN LIGTING LOW BEAM REY ACTIVATE LAPP LHD WER ms ming ow LIFT imr oc ya HILL DESSERT Ve PARA INTERMITTENT MIFER WITCH POWER OUTLET NS OUTLET COMTI BRAKE PEE ES a teat ty oe j CV me N GT Dad amp ow H EC oy PLUS PAL SIDE REAR YVEMDON MEMEL WAS DOME LHAT PRONT FOG LIGHT H ODDRELEANE LOWER AIH REC CULATION ELEC TAOAH ALL PHHEP PLUME DE ANTHLOER WEATHER FLLE LEVEL MLET Ni BrAUum IY coq mwE Mar ETSIEM 0 0 7 wn G amp 00 c Bi awo snae MIHDEHIELD s ELECTPONIG ERAKE SYST ENGINE NL HEAT MANTEO ELEETRICALAY PARK LTS WEAR HET Lae MEAS AE GUAT AND VENTILATING FAN RHODA LOER THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARHWMNG PARKINWU HEATED DPEN LOWES i CUITLET OAT Rao BANE BHAKE EA um T s d ea LID fi HAUL BATTERY HEATED Mo PANO
415. t N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have a
416. t anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag unless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over th
417. t meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having a
418. t on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select a lower gear range using the AutoStick shift control NOTE Selecting a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 435 If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency AutoStick By using the AutoStick mode and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4
419. t or e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ieee Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR to secure a Child Restraint System CR5 These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Driver Center Passenger CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock ALR ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor In
420. te the override 051210780 Shift Lever Override N WHATTODOI NEMERGENCIES 455 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE MEE Condition Wheels OFF the Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS IF Transmission is operable Haw tT NONE I Frant e 30 mph 48 km h max speed Wheel Lift e 15 mi 24 km max distance Rear OK Transin NEUTRAL Flatbed ABR _ E BEST METHOD OOK Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN equipment designed for the purpose following equip position not the ACC position 6 ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If the vehicle s battery is discharged see Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing 456 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION e Do not use sling type equipment when towing Damage to the fascia will occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to the front or rear suspension compo nents Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Do not push or tow
421. th with all are sent Last Last number or incoming Incoming Phonebook phone number or call list will screen will dialed is phoneis be shown redialed dial Dial Tones for numbers stored in Voicemail password are sent Notes 1 You can replace John Smith with amy name in your mobile or favorites phone book You can also say Call John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to call for John Smath 2 You can replace Mobile with Home Work ar Other 3 You can replace Incoming calle with oulgoing calls missed calls or all calls 4 You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone 5 These commands can be used during a phone call after pushing the connect voice command bulton insert talking head icon on the steering wheel Please nate the call will be mubed while ihe VR session is active 8 Send dial tones for automanted systems i available while a call is active 7 Storng Dial tones in contact names is possible but only the first number encountered in a contact name will be sent For example if there is a number stored in the Home and Work numbers for the contact Voicemail password only the Home number will be sent 8 If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over BT than these commands will retam a response mdicaling thal the contact does not exist in the phonebook 9 Emergency and Towing assistance ame contacts th
422. that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Ex amples of this message type are Memory System Un available Not in Park and Automatic High Beams On The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Shift Lev
423. the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low eee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision AI ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radia
424. the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings Press the More soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect Touch system allows you to access program mable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks RE per Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation ESTEE Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup 68 ad FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou Settings Display Clock Safety amp Driving Assistance Lights NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a Hume Uconnect Touch 8 4 Soft Keys When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 Once the sett
425. the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 WARNING Continued e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 Max loading as defined on the Tire and Load ing Information placard 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti lized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check
426. the head restraint is located above the top of your ear Manual Recline Lever N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Active Head Restraints Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with The head restraints for all occupant s must be prop Active Head Restraints AHR In the event of a rear erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a head and the AHR 3 vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The AHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact If the AHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by restraint To lower the head restraint press the push qualified technicians for service purposes only If either button located at the base of the head restraint and push of the head restraints require removal see your autho downward on the head restraint rized dealer WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or port
427. the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack Continued 440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire Opening The Access Panel NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to 3 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire access the jack 1 Open the trunk 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 441 Spare Tire Fastener 4 Remove the spare tire Jack Fastener 442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 6 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left WARNING to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly WARNINCG e A loose tire or jack thrown
428. the person listed in those documents 536 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National High
429. thin 5 ft 1 5 m of the deck lid press the button on the right side of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is located on the deck lid 021840110 CHMSL Button 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of the deck lid To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock both doors Outside Door Handle Lock Button 021836569 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows
430. this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON position not in the LOCK or ACC positions The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur Flatbed towing is recommended DO NOT tow an AWD vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground If the transmission is operable vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under the following conditions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 mi 24 km e The vehicle speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in NEUTRAL N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 457 CAUTION Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed Failure to follow these towing methods can cause with the ignition in the OFF position The only approved severe transmission damage Such damage is not method of towing without the ignition key is with a covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle Vehicles eq
431. tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value 402 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized f
432. to thieves Always fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or T others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil SER RET dren should be warned not to touch the parking The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls Or The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry move the vehicle RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a Do not leave children or animals inside parked RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the cause serious injury or death vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
433. tomatic 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Re fer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information Trailer And Tongue Weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in your bumper or trailer hitch the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive
434. ton within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped is in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE e For vehicles equipped with the E
435. tower inside the engine compart ment INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING ues Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Word About Your Keys 12 O Keyless Ignition Node KIN 12 od de 2 24 dg ayes au ER EE EE a 13 O Ignition Or Accessory On Message 14 NM Sentry Key EE EE OR N 15 E Replacement Keys 2 2 2644 RS RTT ES 16 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information 222 c9 be rege 17 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped O Rearming Of The System o To Arm The System o To Disarm The System ue doe scr ee RE Bi illuminated Entry If Equipped ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE D To Unlock The Doors o To Lock The Doors O To Unlatch The Trunk 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee E Using The Panic Alari cue eap EE EER DE 23 O Programming Additional Transmitters 29 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 23 O General Information 24 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 El How io Use Remote Start iae seas 25 lg Door Locks EE SS ES SS ee 28 Hi Manual Door Locks 22 9454 pseu ee es 28 OPower Door Locks wise cs oe xs ee s C UR CER 29 o Child Protection Door Lock
436. traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary To maximize fuel economy your AWD vehicle automati cally defaults to rear wheel drive RWD when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera ture wheel slip or other predetermined conditions there may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs AWD can also be manually se lected by moving the shift lever into the AutoStick mode or activating the windshield wipers for an extended period of time Drive mode RWD or AWD is displayed momentarily in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the gage area of the vehicle display when the transmission is first shifted into gear and if the drive mode changes during vehicle operation NOTE If the SERVICE AWD SYSTEM warning mes sage appears after engine start up or during driving it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Und
437. ttachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should never install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts LATCH Anchorages Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system e ls meets the seatback and are located just below the button with the anchorage symbol on the rear seat but are not visible You will easily feel them if you run your fi
438. tter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 034134074 Power Sunroof Switch 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Expre
439. ture turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights will turn On the first time the vehicle is shifted out of PARK and remain On unless the Parking Brake is applied Upon returning to the PARK position the DRLs will turn Off DRLs will turn Off when the ignition is switched OFF NOTE The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch i
440. turn the ignition switch to the ON the engine is running and that the OBD II system is position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of ready for testing a normal bulb check Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently happen serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace MEHR UE IIR EUN EE E ment If the OBD II system should be determined not readvsiorihe M test vourveluclemes il hees return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF l the ignition or start the engine This means that your Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should which you can use prior to going to the test station To not proceed to the I M station check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must oda following b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system crank or start the engine is ready and you can proceed to the I M station 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your this test over authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacemen
441. tute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the PARK position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 CAUTION CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason moved out of PARK before the ignition light is with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmis turned from the OFF to the RUN position sion damage REVERSE This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward WARNING Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the NEUTRAL ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provid
442. uipped with AWD can be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on speed or distance MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 3 6L 461 N Engine Compartment 5 7L 462 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 463 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance L EDOTOBIS s 4 oe bce w dca acd aote doe Sb ew RR 463 W Replacement Parts sie pes RET v 465 W Dealer Service 0000 eee 465 Bl Maintenance Procedures 466 BEREID i5ayaceu se ees dhe VER 467 O Engine QU PHGE san 2 EERS eg eee ios 470 E Engine Air Cleaner Filter i e es RR ER DI 470 O Mamtenauce Free Battery iva dar Rs 47 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 473 O A C Air Filler eee 0 Body Lubrication O Windshield Wiper Blades 476 o Adding Washer Fluid seus 477 HLExhausb Systemi 14 293 4934 5 bee eens 73 478 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M EG ooie sie 234944394 5 eee Pea Pd 480 E DIES D leid a oce deer ees que ch aie pp ee Di 486 O Automatic Transmission 488 o All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 490 Real gle 4 dsc keae 2 AO E NOSOP RH E S EUR E 490 D Appearance Care And Protection From CONDSIOIE anes edo edu bee AAR HR DER ete 491 dn P 496 H Integrated Power Module 496 O Rear Power Distribution Center ll Vehicle Storage N Replacement Bu
443. ulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 8 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ies ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on
444. ur finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting e Balance Fade Touch the Balance Fade soft key to change this display When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Speed Adjusted Volume Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft key to change this display This feature increases or decreases volume rela tive to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the OFF 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 e Surround Sound Touch the Surround Sound soft key to change this dis play This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection press the Surround Sound soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch Supplement SIRIUS Setup e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip Then touch the arrow back soft key e Subscription Info New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following
445. ur air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation 1 Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Access Door 2 Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 ES m Filter Access Cover A C Air Filter 3 Remove the used filter 5 Close the filter access cover 4 Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals vehicle text and arrows on the filter will indicate this 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Body Lubrication
446. urbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity Continued 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued WARNING Continued e The vehicle must be driven slowly when using e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued system it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending o
447. urity Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 additional minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the theft alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle e l ress LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open e Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion e Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods e Press the UNLOCK
448. uspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for whichever occurs first damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 526 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule d d Odometer Reading Repair Order Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD Date Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule m d Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 128 000 miles 208 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs
449. vailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others NS TA TING AND OPERATING 375 Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not
450. vehicle damage ParkView should only using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob drive path structions or blind spots before backing up You are To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using Park View to be able to must continue to pay attention while backing up stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touch Screen Radio Turn the Radio on Press the More soft key Press the Settings soft key Press the check box soft key next to Parkview 1 2 3 4 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 5 Backup Camera to enable disable OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink power liftgate and power sunroof switches may also
451. water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provid
452. way Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer NN FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 537 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O
453. will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the OFF Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e Rain Sensing Touch the Rain Sensing soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Hill Start Assist If Equipped Touch the Hill Start Assist soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Lights e Headlight Off Delay Touch the He
454. witch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 WARNING Continued increase or decrease the lumbar support Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the support shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move
455. with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the Messaging button will be greyed out and the feature will not be available for use NOTE Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when the vehicle is not in moving N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 68 4 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou We 72 68 TM FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou Wo 72 Messaging gt Indo X Inbox 14 James Butler Listen James Butier 9 39 am 12 08 08 Hey Bill am on my way to work Let me know if you have Now bj 13 248 576 5459 Listen Message D 12 Beatrice Adams Listen mm 11 Sanjiv Prabaker Listen om 10 Lin Ford Listen 9 Jay Kay Listen Read Messages Once a message is received and viewed or listened to If you receive a new text message while your phone is YOu Will have the following options connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will e Send a Reply be made to notify you that you have a new text message e Forward e Call 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Send Messages Using Soft Keys 68 4 7 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou 72 You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send Messaging gt New Messag x a new message e Touch the Phone soft key Now 2 No 3 Call me Message e Touch the messaging soft key then New Message Yor 4 Need directions e Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person 5 I ll be there in XX minutes you wish to send the message to 6 Okay e f
456. xample e Once Emergency is touched the Edit soft key appears Touch the Edit soft key and you will be given the choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default e Follow the on screen prompts to complete the task Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Number Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back e Mobile Phonebook N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 e Recent Call Log NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be done with 1 call or less active Dial By Saying A Number e Press the amp button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e The Uconnect Phone will dial 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are
457. y of burns Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injuries medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise par ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the Heat position Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches Press the Cold symbol once to turn on the cupholder press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off Press the Hot symbol once to activate the cupholder press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide con venient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintain ing a resting place for the rear occupant s elbows 035139997 Rear Seat Cupholders Lighted Cupholders If Equipped On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control Refer to Lights in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle for further information Light Ring In Rear Cupholder UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 STORAGE Glovebox Storage J The g
458. your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg Occupants Combined weight of TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo from Tire Placard EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 865 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 865 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib ess 160 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 387 388 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire over heating and failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pr
459. ys the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the rad
460. ystem monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when 3 As soon as you

2011 Dodge Charger Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents